(recover-session): Make directories as necessary
[bpt/emacs.git] / etc / NEWS
CommitLineData
404fa7d6
DL
1GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 5 Jan 2000
2Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
3See the end for copying conditions.
4
5Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
6For older news, see the file ONEWS.
7
8\f
251584f3
DL
9* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
1fa28578
GM
11** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
12the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
13
14** There are new configure options associated with the support for
15images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option to list them.
16\f
17* Changes in Emacs 21.1
18
abfcc168
GM
19** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
20sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
874d1079 21(On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
abfcc168
GM
22You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location.
23
cc181e95
GM
24** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
25on the display using several methods
26
27- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
28a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
29be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
30
31- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
32equivalent ot specifying the frame parameter.
33
34- By specifying `--line-spaceing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
35
36- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
37the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
38
0daee095 39** The new command `clone-buffer-indirectly' can be used to create
1c459486
GM
40an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
41command `clone-buffer-indirectly-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
42does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
0daee095 43
176256a1 44** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
3bbc50af
DL
45`make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
46typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
176256a1 47
dd0add8e
DL
48** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
49characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
50
699238d9
GM
51** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
52compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
53this behavior.
54
55The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
56compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
57Emacs dump core.
58
59** New X resources recognized
100b3cbb 60
7233c5bd
GM
61*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
62whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
63is useful for debugging X problems.
64
65Example:
66
699238d9 67 emacs.synchronous: true
7233c5bd 68
100b3cbb
GM
69*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
70visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
71the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
72and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
73visual class names are
74
75 TrueColor
76 PseudoColor
77 DirectColor
78 StaticColor
79 GrayScale
80 StaticGray
81
82Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
83`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
84meaning.
85
86The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
87supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
88`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
89visual.
90
91Example:
92
699238d9 93 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
100b3cbb
GM
94
95*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
96specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
97default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
98resource values are `true' or `on'.
99
100Example:
101
699238d9 102 emacs.privateColormap: true
100b3cbb 103
0d0c76b8
EZ
104** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
105more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
106now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
107
42088c12 108** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
c60ea02e 109display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
42088c12
GM
110shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
111be customized.
c60ea02e 112
31047e0d
DL
113** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
114
b02786f9
GM
115** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
116all frames except the selected one.
117
3261c1d8
DL
118** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
119to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
120
ffe36136
GM
121** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
122the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X either in the echo
123area or with tooltips.
124
559cee90
DL
125** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
126read mail from the menu etc.
127
271b4185
GM
128** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
129a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
130
0daee095
GM
131** Changes in Texinfo mode.
132
133** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
134macros
135
136 Key binding Macro
137 -------------------------
138 C-c C-c C-s @strong
139 C-c C-c C-e @emph
140 C-c C-c u @url
141 C-c C-c q @quotation
142 C-c C-c m @email
143
559cee90
DL
144** Changes in Outline mode.
145
146There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
147`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
148the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
149
404fa7d6
DL
150** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
151groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
152
8964fec7
SM
153** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either M-x clone-buffer
154or C-u m <entry> RET. M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and
155several other special buffers.
156
39783d73
WP
157** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
158under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
159.emacs file.
160
161The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
162determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
163
d35fce81
GM
164** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
165abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
166`directory-abbrev-alist'.
167
df5a1902
GM
168** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
169is running in batch mode. For example,
170
171 (message "%s" (read t))
172
173will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
174to standard output.
175
a933dad1
DL
176** Faces and frame parameters.
177
178There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
179Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
180`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
181`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
182sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
183for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
184parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
185
186Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
187`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
79214ddf 188`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
a933dad1
DL
189`default' face and vice versa.
190
f77a4a8a
GM
191** New face `menu'.
192
193The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
194Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
195attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
196
a933dad1
DL
197** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
198
199The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
200colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
201correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
202the screen gamma of a frame's display.
203
204PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
205in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
206color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
207
208The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
209`ScreenGamma'.
210
211** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
212
213The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
214Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
215oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
216of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
217the text.
218
219** Emacs has a new face implementation.
220
221The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
222font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
223height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
224These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
225specify a font.
226
227Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
228These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
229under Lisp changes, below.
230
231** New default font is Courier 12pt.
232
233** When using a windowing terminal, Emacs window now has a cursor of
234its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid; otherwise,
235it is hollow.
236
237** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
238truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
239foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
240customizing face `fringe'.
241
242** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. You
243can change its appearance by modifying the face `modeline'.
244
245** LessTif support.
246
247Emacs now runs with LessTif (see <http://www.lesstif.org>). You will
248need a version 0.88.1 or later.
249
250** Toolkit scroll bars.
251
252Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
253LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
254configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
255bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
256bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
257Emacs.
258
259When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
260Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
261Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
262Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
263define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
264`s/freebsd.h' as an example.
265
266Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
267a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
268directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
269different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
270system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
271add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
272
273The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
274`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
275This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
276image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
277Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
278
279** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
280
281When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
282widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
283Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
284
285** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
286
287When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
288whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
289defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
290highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
291displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
292whitespace.
293
294** Busy-cursor.
295
296Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
297display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
298
299** Blinking cursor
300
301M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
302terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
303and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
304the group `cursor'.
305
306** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
307
308This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
309generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
310See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
311details.
312
313Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
314have to do anything to activate it.
315
316** Tabs and variable-width text.
317
318Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
319defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
320independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
321Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
322
323** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
324
325*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
326
327 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
328
79dd1637
RS
329The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
330LessTif/Motif one.
a933dad1 331
79dd1637
RS
332*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
333LessTif and Motif.
a933dad1
DL
334
335** Hscrolling in C code.
336
cc181e95
GM
337Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
338`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
339customized.
a933dad1
DL
340
341** Tool bar support.
342
343Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
344how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level changes.
345
346** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
347
348Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
349mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
350line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
351about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
352in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
353
354Currently, the following actions have been defined:
355
356- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
357buffers.
358
359- Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
360M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
361
362- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
363
559cee90 364- Mouse-2 on the read-only status in the mode line (`%' or `*')
a933dad1
DL
365toggles the read-only status.
366
367- Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
368
369** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
370
371When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
e33b0397 372from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
a933dad1
DL
373non-nil.
374
375** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
376
377Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
378Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
379the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
380italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
381Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
382attributes like overlines, strike-throught, box are ignored.
383
384** Sound support
385
386Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
387(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
388Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
389(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
390to enable sound support.
391
392** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
393the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
394forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
395value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
396users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
397even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
398
399The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
400
401** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
402
403As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
404drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
405`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
406
407** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
408bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
409
410This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
411`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
412variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
413
414** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
415
416When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
417value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggessively' is a
418number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
419fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
420
421When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
422value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
423number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
424fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
425
426** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
427notably at the end of lines.
428
429All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
430spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
431
eee54b0e
DL
432There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
433
a933dad1
DL
434** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
435query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
436after each match to get the replacement text.
437
438** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
439
440If a message is longer than one line, or mini-buffer contents are
441longer than one line, Emacs now resizes the mini-window unless it is
442on a frame of its own. You can control the maximum mini-window size
443by setting the following variable:
444
445- User option: max-mini-window-height
446
447Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
448fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
449specifies a number of lines. If nil, don't resize.
450
451Default is 0.25.
452
0d43b60d
GM
453** Changes to hideshow.el
454
455Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
456selection and traversal and includes more isearch support.
457
458*** Generalized block selection and traversal
459
460A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
461(both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
462which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
463`forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
464point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
465(which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
466
467If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
468i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
469backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
470the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
471
472*** Isearch support for updating mode line
473
474During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
475blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
476line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
477portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
478is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
479
480To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
481something like this in your .emacs.
482
483 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
484 (lambda ()
485 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
486
559cee90
DL
487** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
488
489If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes an
490entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
491log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
492
493New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the current
494buffer, fixing old-style date formats if necessary.
eb2aac9d
GM
495
496Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log entries
497if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
498
499The search for a file's version number is performed based on regular
500expressions from `change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be
501cutomized. Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of
502a file.
503
3476b54a
GM
504** Changes in Font Lock
505
506*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
507font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major
508mode.
509
b3b98592
GM
510** Comint (subshell) changes
511
512Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
513and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
514
515The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
516buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
517buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
518
519The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
520M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
521the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
522
e26cec67
GM
523** Changes to Rmail mode
524
c0510d27
GM
525*** The new user-option rmail-rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
526set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when
527receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
528recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
529`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
530as correspondent.
531
532Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
533mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
534regexp matching your mail adresses.
535
3b55acc9
GM
536*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
537to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
538Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
539with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
540for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
541
6a1950ec
GM
542*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
543like `j'.
544
5bb6f079
RS
545*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
546specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
2d5e9b54 547digest message.
e26cec67 548
400a1ed0
GM
549** Changes to TeX mode
550
551The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
552`latex-mode'.
553
a933dad1
DL
554** Changes to RefTeX mode
555
556*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
557 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
558 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
559 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
560 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
561 can be edited from that buffer.
562
563*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
564 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
565 `A' to use all marked entries).
566
567*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
568 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
569
570*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
571 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
572 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
573 been cited.
574
38de9631
GM
575** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
576The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
577semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
578in column 1 are always made leaves.
579
a933dad1
DL
580** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
581has the following new features:
582
583*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
584may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
585to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
586time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
587
588*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
589feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
590file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
591compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
592pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
593defaults to 1.
594
595** Tooltips.
596
597Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
598mouse position. To use them, use the Lisp package `tooltip' which you
599can access via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
600
601Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
602variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
603the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
604tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
605
606** Customize changes
607
608*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
34f94cf9
DL
609`State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
610cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
611
612*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
613Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
614default).
615
0ae51efb
GM
616*** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
617between custom options. Example:
618
619 (defcustom default-input-method nil
620 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
621 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
622 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
623 :group 'mule
624 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
625 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
626
627This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
628current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
629first in a custom-set-variables statement.
630
a933dad1
DL
631** New features in evaluation commands
632
633The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
634modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
635print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
636customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
637eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
638
a933dad1
DL
639** Dired changes
640
641*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
642command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
643is, delete only empty directories.
644
645*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
646command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
647copy directories recursively.
648
f6737cde
GM
649*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
650in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
651the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
652
a933dad1
DL
653** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
654use the -f option when sending mail.
655
b1c609b1
GM
656** CC mode changes.
657
658Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
659current user setups (although it's believed that these
660incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
661However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
662back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
663compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
664release.
665
666*** New initialization procedure for the style system.
667When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
668variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
669take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
670is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
671settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
672possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
673Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
674
675By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
676special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
677the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
678of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
679above.
680
681Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
682when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
683function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
684call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
685then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
686values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
687only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
688function documentation for more info.
689
690The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
691especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
692with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
693intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
694such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
695is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
696configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
697global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
698
699(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
700
701**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
702This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
703
704This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
705variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
706completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
707the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
708empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
709style system.
710
711**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
712In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
713c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
714as far as possible.
715
716*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
717CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
718surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
719chapter about this in the manual.
720
721**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
722The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
723recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
724primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
725adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
726
727**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
728This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
729c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
730
731**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
732This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
733
734It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
735Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
736A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
737inside CC Mode.
738
739Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
740causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
741the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
742available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
743cc-mode/).
744
745**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
746The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
747specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
748literals.
749
750**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
751It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
752prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
753you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
754this function.
755
756*** Fixes to IDL mode.
757It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
758to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
759struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
760Thanks to Eric Eide.
761
762*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
763It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
764opening braces hangs and when they don't.
765
766**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
767
768*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
769See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
770better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
771and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
772
773*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
774previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
775the column specified by comment-column.
776
777*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
778In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
779is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
780prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
781contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
782don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
783
784*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
785instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
786arguments.
787
788*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
789
790*** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
791c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
792c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
793variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
794Provan).
795
796*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
797
c407c570
GM
798** Makefile mode changes
799
800*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
801
802*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
803Fontlock mode is active.
804
87be76f6
GM
805** Isearch changes
806
c407c570
GM
807** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
808respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
809that started the search.
810
87be76f6 811*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
a933dad1
DL
812selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
813
87be76f6
GM
814*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
815
d35fce81 816Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
87be76f6
GM
817`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
818search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
819before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
820highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
821`secondary-selection'.
822
823The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
824will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
825Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
826using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
827usual snappy response.
828
829If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
830matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
831set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
832isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
833
35384f06
GM
834** Changes in sort.el
835
836The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
12c25bdc 837as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
35384f06
GM
838new user-option sort-numberic-base can be used to specify a default
839numeric base.
87be76f6 840
d7b511c4
GM
841** Changes to Ange-ftp
842
843*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
d67f47e4
DL
844names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
845sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
846
d7b511c4
GM
847*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
848ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
849
4b9347b3
GM
850** Shell script mode changes.
851
852Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
853derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
854sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
855
79214ddf
FP
856** Etags changes.
857
858*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
859
aca0be23 860*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
8dc78b52
FP
861possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
862{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
863This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
864a regular expression. The manual contains details.
aca0be23 865
79214ddf
FP
866*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
867declarations when given the --declarations option.
868
869*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
aca0be23 870"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
79214ddf
FP
871
872*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
873types.
874
875*** In Fortran, procedure is no more tagged.
876
877*** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
878
879*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
880are now tagged.
881
882*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
883variables are tagged.
884
885*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
886
8dc78b52
FP
887*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
888for PSWrap.
79214ddf 889
f6737cde
GM
890** Changes in etags.el
891
3f6e4b8b
GM
892*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
893tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
894is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
895
f6737cde
GM
896*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
897the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
898
899If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
900FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
901TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
902obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
903
904TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
905
906FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
907List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
908
909A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
910
911 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
912 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
913 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
914
915*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
916of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
917
918*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
919names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
920
fbc164de
PE
921** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
922and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
923LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
924
59c1bf85
DL
925** New language environments `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
926These correspond respectively to the ISO character sets 8859-14
927(Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign). There is
928currently no specific input method support for them.
929
e33b0397
DL
930** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sqeuence-nos' to
931remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
932appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
933
934** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
935
6f8ea2ae
DL
936** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
937
c0510d27
GM
938** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignore-regexps'
939containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
940expression from that list, are not checked.
941
a933dad1
DL
942** New modes and packages
943
5e5dff44
GM
944*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
945authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
946
947The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
948the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
949the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
950Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
951even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
952single step.
953
954On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
955matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
956probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
957contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
958
f7136ee8
GM
959*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
960unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
961actually modifying content of a buffer.
962
bbd9b566
GM
963*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
964PostScript.
965
966Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
967
968The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
969
970 ; comment (until end of line)
971 A non-terminal
972 "C" terminal
973 ?C? special
974 $A default non-terminal
975 $"C" default terminal
976 $?C? default special
977 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
978 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
979 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
980 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
981 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
982 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
983 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
984 C+ one or more occurrences of C
985 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
986 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
987 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
988 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
989 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
990 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
991 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
992
993Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
994
99453a38
GM
995*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
996align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
997determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
998example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
999equal signs of assignments.
1000
559cee90
DL
1001*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1002paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1003
6448a6b3
GM
1004*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1005list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1006buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
1007customize the package.
1008
249652b1
GM
1009*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1010replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1011is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1012and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1013not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1014which answers different needs.
1015
3476b54a
GM
1016*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1017suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1018expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1019course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1020reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1021to be enabled.
1022
8964fec7
SM
1023*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1024containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1025
a933dad1
DL
1026*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1027
1028*** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
1029
1030*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1031
1032*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1033Pascal) language.
1034
1035*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1036the text at point.
1037
1038*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1039
8d54eb69
DL
1040*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1041
a933dad1
DL
1042*** whitespace.el ???
1043
ebcfda83
GM
1044*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1045files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1046(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1047interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1048often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1049uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1050codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1051
1052*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1053
1054Here is an example of columns:
1055
1056horse apple bus
1057dog pineapple car EXTRA
1058porcupine strawberry airplane
1059
1060Doing the following settings:
1061
1062 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1063 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1064 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1065 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1066
1067
1068Selecting the lines above and typing:
1069
1070 M-x delimit-columns-region
1071
1072It results:
1073
1074[ horse , apple , bus , ]
1075[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1076[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1077
1078delim-col has the following options:
1079
1080 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1081 before all columns.
1082
1083 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1084 between each column.
1085
1086 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1087 after all columns.
1088
1089 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
1090 each column.
1091
1092delim-col has the following commands:
1093
1094 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
1095 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
1096
f507826c
GM
1097*** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
1098were operated on recently. When enabled, a new "Open Recent" submenu
1099is displayed in the "Files" menu.
1100
1101The recent files list is automatically saved across Emacs sessions.
1102
1103To enable/disable recentf use M-x recentf-mode.
1104
1105To enable recentf at Emacs startup use
1106M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET.
1107
1108To change the number of recent files displayed and others options use
1109M-x customize-group RET recentf RET.
1110
8062f458
DL
1111*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
1112text.
1113
36e24b82 1114*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
91735437
DL
1115of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
1116specific to Message mode.
1117
36e24b82
DL
1118*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
1119viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
1120with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
1121
aaa659ef
DL
1122*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
1123interface to access directory servers using different directory
1124protocols. It has a separate manual.
1125
eee54b0e
DL
1126*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
1127for Autoconf, selected automatically.
1128
612839b6
GM
1129*** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
1130
1131*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
1132minibuffer with completion.
aaa659ef 1133
a933dad1
DL
1134** Withdrawn packages
1135
1136*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
1137functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
25a81338 1138
3261c1d8
DL
1139*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
1140
1141*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
a933dad1
DL
1142\f
1143* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
1144
1145Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
1146--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
1147When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
1148so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
1149
3bbc50af
DL
1150** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments, as
1151promised long ago.
1152
7464346d
GM
1153** The function `add-minor-mode' simplifies the definition of minor
1154modes.
1155
c94f4677 1156- Function: add-minor-mode TOGGLE NAME &optional KEYMAP AFTER TOGGLE-FUN
7464346d 1157
c94f4677
GM
1158Register a new minor mode.
1159
1160TOGGLE is a symbol which is the name of a buffer-local variable that
1161is toggled on or off to say whether the minor mode is active or not.
1162
1163NAME specifies what will appear in the mode line when the minor mode
1164is active. NAME should be either a string starting with a space, or a
1165symbol whose value is such a string.
1166
1167Optional KEYMAP is the keymap for the minor mode that will be added
1168to `minor-mode-map-alist'.
1169
1170Optional AFTER specifies that TOGGLE should be added after AFTER
1171in `minor-mode-alist'.
1172
1173Optional TOGGLE-FUN is there for compatiblity with other Emacssen.
1174It is currently not used.
7464346d 1175
612839b6
GM
1176** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
1177`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
1178from which the command was issued.
1179
1180** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
1181`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
1182`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
1183additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
1184operate on.
1185
271b4185
GM
1186** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
1187to `window-buffer-height'.
1188
1189- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
1190
1191Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
1192The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
1193lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
1194
1195Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
1196respectively.
1197
1198If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument
1199COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
1200
1201The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
1202obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
1203on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
1204
1205Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
1206buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
1207possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
1208is currently displayed in some window.
1209
3c30cb6e
DL
1210** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
1211argument function's results.
1212
62f20204
GM
1213** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
1214signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
1215
c0510d27
GM
1216** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
1217header is the list of headers passed to it.
1218
1219** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
1220ignores differences in case and text representation.
1221
1222** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
19d1bc27
GM
1223cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
1224as follows:
1225
1226 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
1227 nil don't display a cursor
1228 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
1229 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
1230 others display a box cursor.
1231
9a0dd3dc
GM
1232** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
1233an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
1234defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
1235set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
1236
d7b511c4
GM
1237** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
1238specificationa in string form as accepted my `modify-syntax-entry' to
1239the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
1240text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
1241
1242Example:
1243
1244 (string-to-syntax "()")
1245 => (4 . 41)
1246
1fa28578
GM
1247** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
1248other than 10.
1249
1250*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
1251INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
1252
1253 #b1111
1254 => 15
1255 #b-1111
1256 => -15
1257
1258*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
1259
1260 #o666
1261 => 438
1262
1263*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
1264
1265 #xbeef
1266 => 48815
1267
1268*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
1269
1270 #2R-111
1271 => -7
1272 #25rah
1273 => 267
1274
3d4ff2dd 1275** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
e9b4e5ff
GM
1276the given property to obtain a a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
1277and isn't a string.
1278
3d4ff2dd
GM
1279** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
1280a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
1281value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
1282not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
1283
16ce590d
DL
1284+++
1285** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
1286
73825616 1287** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
16ce590d
DL
1288for a regexp in a string.
1289
1290** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
1291`mouse-position-function'.
1292
723e779c
GM
1293** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
1294that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
1295
d1e103b2
GM
1296** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
1297Keywords are now always considered constants.
1298
31047e0d
DL
1299+++
1300** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
1301returns it.
1302
7a85e4df
GM
1303** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
1304returned by function `recent-keys'.
1305
02b14400
RS
1306+++
1307** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
1308can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
1309Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
1310etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
1311mode.
404fa7d6 1312
02b14400 1313+++
8964fec7
SM
1314** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
1315and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
1316
02b14400
RS
1317+++
1318** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
1319has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
1320function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
1321returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
1322been performed."
1323
1324When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
1325and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
1326hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
1327then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
ef961722 1328
02b14400 1329+++
81da8b32
GM
1330** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
1331In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
1332and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
1333
02b14400 1334+++
9e207b90
GM
1335** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
1336with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
1337specified table.
1338
1339 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
1340
1341Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
03d9c64c
GM
1342TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
1343saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
1344what BODY returns.
9e207b90 1345
02b14400 1346+++
d7f89643 1347** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
95cd4c40 1348Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
8964fec7 1349
02b14400 1350+++
dde9e75a
GM
1351** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
1352removed since it wasn't used by anything.
1353
02b14400 1354+++
9da30515
GM
1355** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
1356instead of being optional.
1357
02b14400 1358+++
d20679eb
GM
1359** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
1360modify read-only text.
1361
02b14400 1362+++
fbc164de
PE
1363** New functions and variables for locales.
1364
1365The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
1366decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
b718982a
PE
1367time functions like strftime. The new variables
1368`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
1369locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
fbc164de
PE
1370
1371The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
1372environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
1373the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
b718982a
PE
1374environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
1375not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
1376`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
1377`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
fbc164de 1378
02b14400 1379+++
863476d1
SM
1380** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
1381To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
1382modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
1383start sequences.
1384
02b14400 1385+++
ef6d912c
GM
1386** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
1387because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
1388
02b14400 1389+++
a933dad1
DL
1390** New function `propertize'
1391
1392The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
1393strings with text properties.
1394
1395- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
1396
1397Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
1398by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
1399PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
1400specified value of that property. Example:
1401
1402 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
1403
1404+++
1405** push and pop macros.
1406
02b14400
RS
1407Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
1408are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
a933dad1
DL
1409as the place that holds the list to be changed.
1410
1411(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
1412(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
1413 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
1414
02b14400
RS
1415** New dolist and dotimes macros.
1416
6c7fd5aa
RS
1417Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
1418are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
02b14400
RS
1419
1420(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
1421 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
1422 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
1423 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
1424
1425(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
1426 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
1427 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
1428 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
1429
a933dad1
DL
1430+++
1431** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such
1432as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on.
1433
1434[:digit:] matches 0 through 9
1435[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
1436[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
1437[:blank:] matches space and tab only
1438[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
1439 space, and DEL.
1440[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
1441 and DEL.
1442[:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
1443 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1444 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
1445[:alpha:] matches letters.
1446 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1447 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
1448[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
1449[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
1450[:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
1451[:punct:] matches punctuation.
1452 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1453 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
1454[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
1455[:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
1456[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
1457
1458+++
1459** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
1460
1461The following functions are defined for hash tables:
1462
1463- Function: make-hash-table ARGS
1464
1465The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
1466are optional. The following arguments are defined:
1467
1468:test TEST
1469
1470TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
1471Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
1472it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
1473
1474:size SIZE
1475
1476SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
1477many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
1478
1479:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
1480
1481REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
1482full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
1483size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
14841.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
1485old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
1486
1487:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
1488
1489THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
1490hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
1491(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
1492
1493:weakness WEAK
1494
1495WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value', or t.
1496Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage collection if
1497their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere outside of the
1498hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
1499
1500- Function: makehash &optional TEST
1501
1502Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
1503
1504- Function: hash-table-p TABLE
1505
1506Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
1507
1508- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
1509
1510Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
1511values are shared.
1512
1513- Function: hash-table-count TABLE
1514
1515Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
1516
1517- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
1518
1519Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
1520
1521- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
1522
1523Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
1524
1525- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
1526
1527Returns the size of TABLE.
1528
1529- Function: hash-table-rehash-test TABLE
1530
1531Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
1532
1533- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
1534
1535Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
1536
1537- Function: clrhash TABLE
1538
1539Clear TABLE.
1540
1541- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
1542
1543Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
1544not found.
1545
79214ddf 1546- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
a933dad1
DL
1547
1548Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
1549another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
1550
1551- Function: remhash KEY TABLE
1552
1553Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
1554
1555- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
1556
1557Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
1558arguments KEY and VALUE.
1559
1560- Function: sxhash OBJ
1561
1562Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
1563
1564- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
1565
1566Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
1567a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
79214ddf 1568comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
a933dad1
DL
1569and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
1570of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
1571
1572TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
1573
1574HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
1575code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
1576integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
1577
1578Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
1579be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
1580
1581 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
1582 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
1583
1584 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
1585 (sxhash (upcase a)))
1586
79214ddf 1587 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
a933dad1
DL
1588 'case-fold-string-hash))
1589
1590 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
1591
1592+++
1593** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
1594
1595It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
1596circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
1597a cons cell which is its own cdr.
1598
1599+++
1600** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
1601
1602If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
1603#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
1604
a933dad1
DL
1605+++
1606** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
1607t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
1608specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
1609is too short to reach that column.
1610
1611+++
1612** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
1613now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
1614after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
1615two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
1616
1617If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
1618perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
1619and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
1620
1621+++
1622** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
1623to specify which buffer to return the size of.
1624
1625+++
1626** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
1627calendar-move-hook after moving point.
1628
1629+++
1630** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
1631directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
1632small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
1633small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
1634temporary-file-directory instead.
1635
1636+++
1637** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
1638the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
1639`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
1640hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
1641
1642+++
1643** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
1644elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
1645
1646+++
1647** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
1648
1649make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
1650creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
1651ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
1652
1653+++
1654** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
1655
1656The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
1657on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
1658is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
1659never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
1660ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
1661overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
1662
1663If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
1664that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
1665to get an error if the file exists at that time.
1666The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
1667
1668+++
1669** Function `format' now handles text properties.
1670
1671Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
1672If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
1673ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
1674result string.
1675
1676Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
1677string where arguments appear in the result string.
1678
1679Example:
1680
1681 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
1682 (s2 "world"))
1683 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
1684 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
b246b1f6 1685 (format s1 s2))
a933dad1
DL
1686
1687results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
1688
1689+++
1690** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
1691
1692Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
1693The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
1694argument in it.
1695
1696 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
1697 (arg "world"))
1698 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
1699 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
1700 (message msg arg))
1701
1702+++
1703** Sound support
1704
1705Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
1706(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
1707
1708Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
1709(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
1710to enable sound support.
1711
1712Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
1713list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
1714when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
1715functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
1716sound to play, before playing the sound.
1717
1718The following sound properties are supported:
1719
1720- `:file FILE'
1721
1722FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
1723searched relative to `data-directory'.
1724
6fb40beb
GM
1725- `:data DATA'
1726
1727DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
1728may be present, but not both.
1729
a933dad1
DL
1730- `:volume VOLUME'
1731
1732VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
17330..1. This property is optional.
1734
1735Other properties are ignored.
1736
1737** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
356673d4
DL
1738
1739** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
1740a keyword symbol.
fc91dc2d
GM
1741
1742** Changes to garbage collection
1743
1744*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
1745of live and free strings.
1746
1747*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
1748strings that have been consed so far.
1749
a933dad1
DL
1750\f
1751* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
1752
1753Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
1754--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
1755When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
1756so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
1757
f6d3257b
GM
1758** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
1759to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
1760
1761Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
1762text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
1763is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
1764your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
1765laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
1766just display it black instead.
1767
1768This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
1769a line like
1770
1771 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
1772
1773in your `.emacs'.
1774
a933dad1
DL
1775** New face implementation.
1776
1777Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
1778font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
1779
1780+++
1781*** New faces.
1782
1783Each face can specify the following display attributes:
1784
1785 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
79214ddf 1786
a933dad1
DL
1787 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
1788 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
79214ddf 1789
a933dad1 1790 3. Font height in 1/10pt
79214ddf 1791
a933dad1 1792 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
79214ddf 1793
a933dad1 1794 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
79214ddf 1795
a933dad1 1796 6. Foreground color.
79214ddf 1797
a933dad1
DL
1798 7. Background color.
1799
1800 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
1801
1802 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
1803
1804 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
1805
1806 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
1807
1808 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
1809 color.
1810
1811 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
1812 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
1813
1814Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
1815same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
1816frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
1817faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
1818with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
1819attributes mentioned above.
1820
1821There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
1822definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
1823created frames.
79214ddf 1824
a933dad1
DL
1825A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
1826have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
1827`fully-specified'.
1828
1829+++
1830*** Face merging.
1831
1832The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
1833combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
1834aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
1835properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
1836that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
1837results in a fully-specified face.
1838
1839+++
1840*** Face realization.
1841
1842After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
1843merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
1844realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
1845available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
1846face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
1847cache of the frame on which it was realized.
1848
1849Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
1850character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
1851for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
1852charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
1853
1854Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
1855specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
1856being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
1857the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
1858statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
1859
1860In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
1861`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
18620x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
1863the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
1864initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
1865Emacs.
1866
1867Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
1868`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
1869registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
1870with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
1871
1872++++
1873**** Clearing face caches.
1874
1875The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
1876on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
1877unused fonts.
1878
1879+++
1880*** Font selection.
79214ddf 1881
a933dad1
DL
1882Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
1883given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
1884for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
1885
1886If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
1887pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
1888family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
1889property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
1890an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
1891
1892Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
1893against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
1894match for the given face attributes in this font list.
1895
1896Font selection can be influenced by the user.
1897
1898The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
1899attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
1900face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
1901names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
1902that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
1903width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
1904to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
1905
1906Setting `face-alternative-font-family-alist' allows the user to
1907specify alternative font families to try if a family specified by a
1908face doesn't exist.
1909
1910+++
1911**** Scalable fonts
1912
1913Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
1914since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
1915servers.
1916
1917To enable scalable font use, set the variable
b246b1f6 1918`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
a933dad1
DL
1919scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
1920Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
1921scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
1922that list. Example:
1923
1924 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
1925
1926allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
1927
1928+++
1929*** Functions and variables related to font selection.
1930
1931- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
1932
1933Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
1934is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
1935string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
1936
1937If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
1938the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
1939FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
1940POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
1941SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
1942These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
1943if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
1944REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
1945the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
1946of the face font sort order.
1947
79214ddf 1948- Function: x-font-family-list
a933dad1
DL
1949
1950Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
1951omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
1952(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
1953non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
1954
1955- Variable: font-list-limit
1956
1957Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
1958won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
1959matching font. The default is currently 100.
1960
1961+++
1962*** Setting face attributes.
1963
1964For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
1965with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
1966implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
1967`face-attribute'.
1968
1969Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
1970symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
1971
1972The following attributes are recognized:
1973
1974`:family'
1975
1976VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
1977or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
1978and `?' are allowed.
1979
1980`:width'
1981
1982VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
1983It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
1984`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
1985`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
1986
1987`:height'
1988
1989VALUE must be an integer specifying the height of the font to use in
19901/10 pt.
1991
1992`:weight'
1993
1994VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
1995symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
1996`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
1997
1998`:slant'
1999
2000VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
2001symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
2002`reverse-oblique'.
2003
2004`:foreground', `:background'
2005
2006VALUE must be a color name, a string.
2007
2008`:underline'
2009
2010VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
2011VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
2012a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
2013don't underline.
2014
2015`:overline'
2016
2017VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
2018VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
2019string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
2020overline.
2021
2022`:strike-through'
2023
2024VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
2025striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
2026face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
2027is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
2028
2029`:box'
2030
2031VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
2032around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
2033VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
2034of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
2035and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
2036VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
2037:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
2038the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
2039specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
2040defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
2041the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
2042color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
2043should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
2044like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
2045that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
2046the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
2047box.
2048
2049`:inverse-video'
2050
2051VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
2052inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
2053
2054`:stipple'
2055
2056If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
2057The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
2058searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
2059HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
2060is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
2061explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
2062
2063For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
2064and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
2065
2066`:font'
2067
2068Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
2069XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
2070is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
2071versions of Emacs.
2072
2073For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
2074be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
2075must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
2076
2077Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
2078`defface'.
2079
2080*** Face attributes and X resources
2081
2082The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
2083from X resources:
2084
2085 Face attribute X resource class
2086-----------------------------------------------------------------------
2087 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
2088 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
2089 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
2090 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
2091 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
2092 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
2093 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
2094 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
2095 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
2096 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
2097 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
2098 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
2099 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
79214ddf 2100 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
a933dad1
DL
2101 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
2102 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2103 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
2104 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
2105 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2106
2107+++
2108*** Text property `face'.
2109
2110The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
2111specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
2112specification can be
2113
21141. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
2115
21162. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
2117 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
2118 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
2119 for face attribute names.
2120
21213. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
2122 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
2123 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
2124
2125+++
2126** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
2127
acf3ecb7
EZ
2128The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
2129on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
2130the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
a933dad1 2131default. You can get defined colors with a call to
acf3ecb7 2132`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
a933dad1
DL
2133used to clear the mapping table.
2134
acf3ecb7
EZ
2135** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
2136
2137The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
2138and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
2139type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
2140color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
2141display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
2142old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
2143`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
2144compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
2145should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
2146modify their color-related behavior.
2147
2148The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
2149any frame type.
2150
8a5719f0
EZ
2151** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
2152
2153The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
2154`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
2155`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
2156`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
2157`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
2158`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
2159display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
2160the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
2161platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
2162
a933dad1
DL
2163+++
2164** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
a933dad1 2165
463cac2d 2166This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
a933dad1
DL
2167
2168The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
2169end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
2170Otherwise, it returns zero.
2171
463cac2d
GM
2172** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
2173
2174There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
2175buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
2176text-property.
2177
9a9dfda8 2178Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
463cac2d 2179forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9a9dfda8 2180to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
463cac2d 2181not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fc7ac24f
GM
2182commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
2183boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
2184`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
2185functions.
463cac2d
GM
2186
2187Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9a9dfda8 2188a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
463cac2d 2189editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
a933dad1 2190
9a9dfda8
GM
2191The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
2192
2193- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE
2194
2195Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
2196A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2197If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
2198constrained position if that is is different.
2199
2200If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
2201positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
2202ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
2203constrained to the field that has the same `field' text-property
2204as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2205is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
2206fields.
2207
2208If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
2209NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
2210unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
2211C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
2212only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
2213
2214- Function: erase-field &optional POS
2215
2216Erases the field surrounding POS.
2217A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2218If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2219
2220- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2221
2222Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
2223A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2224If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2225If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is already at beginning of an
2226field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
2227
2228- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2229
2230Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
2231A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2232If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2233If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is already at end of a field,
2234then the end of the *following* field is returned.
2235
2236- Function: field-string &optional POS
2237
2238Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
2239A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2240If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2241
2242- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
2243
2244Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
2245A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2246If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2247
a933dad1
DL
2248+++
2249** Image support.
2250
2251Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
2252strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
2253(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
2254replaces the display of the characters having that property.
2255
2256If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
2257`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
2258AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
2259window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
2260area.
2261
2262IMAGE is an image specification.
2263
2264*** Image specifications
2265
2266Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
2267is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
2268specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
35a5514b
GM
2269symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
2270described below are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
2271
2272The following is a list of properties all image types share.
2273
2274`:ascent ASCENT'
2275
2276ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, and specifies the percentage
2277of the image's height to use for its ascent. Default is 50.
2278
2279`:margin MARGIN'
2280
79214ddf 2281MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
a933dad1
DL
2282margin around the image. Default is 0.
2283
2284`:relief RELIEF'
2285
2286RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
2287around an image.
2288
2289`:algorithm ALGO'
2290
2291Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it. ALGO must
2292be a symbol specifying the algorithm. Currently only `laplace' is
2293supported which applies a Laplace edge detection algorithm to an image
2294which is intended to display images "disabled."
2295
2296`:heuristic-mask BG'
2297
2298If BG is not nil, build a clipping mask for the image, so that the
2299background of a frame is visible behind the image. If BG is t,
2300determine the background color of the image by looking at the 4
2301corners of the image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from
2302the corners is the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must
2303be a list `(RED GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the
2304background of the image.
2305
2306`:file FILE'
2307
2308Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
2309search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
2310building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
2311may be present in the image specification.
2312
518df5c4
GM
2313`:data DATA'
2314
2315Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
2316supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
2317present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
2318support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
2319
a933dad1
DL
2320*** Supported image types
2321
b246b1f6 2322**** XBM, image type `xbm'.
a933dad1
DL
2323
2324XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
2325properties supported are
2326
2327`:foreground FG'
2328
2329FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
2330is the frame's foreground.
2331
2332`:background FG'
2333
2334BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
2335the frame's background color.
2336
2337XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
2338case, the image specification must contain the following properties
2339instead of a `:file' property.
2340
2341`:width WIDTH'
2342
2343WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
2344
2345`:height HEIGHT'
2346
2347HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
2348
2349`:data DATA'
2350
2351DATA must be either
2352
2353 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
2354 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
2355
2356 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
2357
2358 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
2359 bitmap.
2360
c76e04a8
GM
2361 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
2362 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
2363 in the file.
2364
a933dad1
DL
2365**** XPM, image type `xpm'
2366
2367XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
2368`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
2369found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
2370`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
2371
2372Additional image properties supported are:
2373
2374`:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
2375
2376SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
2377name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
2378name.
2379
2380XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
2381add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
2382
a933dad1
DL
2383The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
2384to display compressed images.
2385
2386**** PBM, image type `pbm'
2387
2388PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
2389mono images are supported. There are no additional image properties
2390defined.
2391
2392**** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
2393
2394Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3bd37feb
GM
2395package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
2396are:
2397
a933dad1
DL
2398**** TIFF, image type `tiff'
2399
2400Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
2401package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
2402properties defined.
2403
2404**** GIF, image type `gif'
2405
2406Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
2407`libungif-4.1.0', or later.
2408
2409Additional image properties supported are:
2410
2411`:index INDEX'
2412
2413INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
2414multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
2415
2416This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
2417For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
2418at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
2419every 0.1 seconds.
2420
2421(defun show-anim (file max)
2422 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
2423 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
2424
2425(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
2426 (when (= idx max)
2427 (setq idx 0))
518df5c4 2428 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
a933dad1
DL
2429 (save-excursion
2430 (set-buffer buffer)
2431 (goto-char (point-min))
2432 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
2433 (insert-image img "x"))
2434 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
2435
2436**** PNG, image type `png'
2437
2438Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
2439package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
2440properties defined.
2441
2442**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
2443
2444Additional image properties supported are:
2445
2446`:pt-width WIDTH'
2447
2448WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
b246b1f6 2449integer. This is a required property.
a933dad1
DL
2450
2451`:pt-height HEIGHT'
2452
2453HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
b246b1f6 2454must be a integer. This is an required property.
a933dad1
DL
2455
2456`:bounding-box BOX'
2457
2458BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
2459the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
2460files. This is an required property.
2461
2462Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
2463lisp/gs.el.
2464
2465*** Lisp interface.
2466
79214ddf
FP
2467The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
2468which are supported in the current configuration.
a933dad1
DL
2469
2470Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
2471they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
2472The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
084cec2f
GM
2473manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
2474images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
a933dad1
DL
2475
2476*** Simplified image API, image.el
2477
2478The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
2479creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
2480can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
2481define an image based on available image types. The functions
2482`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
2483buffer.
2484
2485+++
2486** Display margins.
2487
2488Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
2489and images.
2490
2491To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
2492`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
2493`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
2494obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
2495`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
2496the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
2497of the display margins.
2498
2499You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
2500containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
2501one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
2502string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
2503in this file).
2504
2505+++
2506** Help display
2507
2508Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
2509moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
2510`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
2511that have a `help-echo' property.
2512
2513The value of the `help-echo' property must be a string. For tool-bar
2514items, their key definition is used to determine the help to display.
2515If their definition contains a property `:help FORM', FORM is
2516evaluated to determine the help string. Otherwise, the caption of the
2517tool-bar item is used.
2518
2519The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
2520help differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window causes the
2521help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
2522
2523+++
2524** Vertical fractional scrolling.
2525
2526The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
2527This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
2528
2529The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
2530scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
2531The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
2532scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
2533used.
2534
79214ddf
FP
2535 (global-set-key [A-down]
2536 #'(lambda ()
a933dad1 2537 (interactive)
79214ddf 2538 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1 2539 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
79214ddf 2540 (global-set-key [A-up]
a933dad1
DL
2541 #'(lambda ()
2542 (interactive)
79214ddf 2543 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1
DL
2544 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
2545
2546+++
2547** New hook `fontification-functions'.
2548
2549Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
2550when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
2551variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
2552is called with one argument, POS.
2553
2554At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
2555characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
2556as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
2557property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
2558`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
2559
2560+++
2561** Tool bar support.
2562
2563Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
2564parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
2565controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
2566suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
2567`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
2568automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
2569
2570*** Tool bar item definitions
2571
2572Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
2573`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
2574where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
79214ddf 2575
a933dad1
DL
2576CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
2577evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
2578the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
2579property (see below).
79214ddf 2580
a933dad1
DL
2581BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
2582binding are currently ignored.
2583
2584The following properties are recognized:
2585
2586`:enable FORM'.
79214ddf 2587
a933dad1
DL
2588FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
2589or disabled.
79214ddf 2590
a933dad1 2591`:visible FORM'
79214ddf 2592
a933dad1 2593FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
79214ddf 2594
a933dad1
DL
2595`:filter FUNCTION'
2596
2597FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
2598FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
2599used instead of BINDING to display this item.
79214ddf 2600
a933dad1
DL
2601`:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
2602
2603TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
2604and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
79214ddf 2605
a933dad1
DL
2606`:image IMAGES'
2607
2608IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
2609image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
2610meaning of each of the four elements:
2611
2612 Index Use when item is
2613 ----------------------------------------
2614 0 enabled and selected
2615 1 enabled and deselected
2616 2 disabled and selected
2617 3 disabled and deselected
79214ddf 2618
a933dad1 2619`:help HELP-STRING'.
79214ddf 2620
a933dad1
DL
2621Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
2622is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
2623
2624*** Tool-bar-related variables.
2625
2626If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
2627resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
2628than 1/4 of the frame's size.
2629
79214ddf 2630If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
a933dad1
DL
2631raised when the mouse moves over them.
2632
2633You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
2634`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
2635pixels. Default is 1.
2636
2637You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
2638`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
2639
2640*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
2641
2642You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
79214ddf 2643a tool bar item. If
a933dad1
DL
2644
2645 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
2646 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
2647 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
2648
2649is the original tool bar item definition, then
2650
2651 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
2652
2653makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
2654item.
2655
2656** Mode line changes.
2657
2658+++
2659*** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
2660
2661The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
2662that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
2663a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
2664
26651. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
2666a `local-map' text property.
2667
26682. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
2669that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
2670
26713. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
2672is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
2673`local-map' property.
2674
2675The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
2676properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
2677example.
2678
54522c9f
GM
2679*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
2680evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
2681
a933dad1
DL
2682+++
2683*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
2684variable mode-line-format to nil.
2685
2686+++
2687*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
2688
2689This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
2690`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
2691completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
2692`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
2693line.
2694
2695The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
2696`header-line'.
2697
2698The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
2699position in the header-line.
2700
2701+++
2702** Text property `display'
2703
2704The `display' text property is used to insert images into text, and
2705also control other aspects of how text displays. The value of the
2706`display' property should be a display specification, as described
2707below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
2708
2709*** Variable width and height spaces
2710
2711To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
2712specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
2713`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
2714area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
2715marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
2716displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
2717simpler form STRETCH as property value.
2718
2719The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
2720PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
2721properties described below.
2722
2723The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
2724characters having the `display' property.
2725
2726- :width WIDTH
2727
2728Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
2729character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
2730
2731- :relative-width FACTOR
2732
2733Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
2734first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
2735same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
2736width of that character by FACTOR.
2737
2738- :align-to HPOS
2739
2740Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
2741value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
2742
2743Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
2744
2745- :height HEIGHT
2746
2747Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
2748normal line height.
2749
2750- :relative-height FACTOR
2751
2752The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
2753of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
2754
2755- :ascent ASCENT
2756
2757Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
2758used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
2759baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
2760equal to 100.
2761
2762You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
2763
2764*** Images
2765
2766A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
2767. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
2768in the display, the characters having this display specification in
2769their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
2770the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
2771`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
2772area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
2773the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
2774as display specification.
2775
2776*** Other display properties
2777
2778- :space-width FACTOR
2779
2780Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
2781should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
2782integer or float.
2783
2784- :height HEIGHT
2785
2786Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
2787
2788If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
2789means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
2790the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
2791``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
2792a font is available counts as a step.
2793
2794If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
2795as tall as the frame's default font.
2796
2797If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
2798height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
2799
2800Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
2801`height' bound to the current specified font height.
2802
2803- :raise FACTOR
2804
2805FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
2806font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
2807raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
2808amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
2809`:height' subproperty.
2810
2811*** Conditional display properties
2812
2813All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
2814has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
2815applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
2816During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
2817the text having the `display' property.
2818
2819The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
2820`(:when t SPEC)'.
2821
2822+++
2823** New menu separator types.
2824
2825Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
2826item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
2827treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
2828to specify other menu separator types.
2829
2830- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
2831
2832No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
2833separator occurs.
2834
2835- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
2836
2837A single line in the menu's foreground color.
2838
2839- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
2840
2841A double line in the menu's foreground color.
2842
2843- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
2844
2845A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
2846
2847- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
2848
2849A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
2850
2851- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
2852
2853A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
2854displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
2855
2856- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
2857
2858A single line with 3D raised appearance.
2859
2860- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
2861
2862A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
2863
2864- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
2865
2866A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
2867
2868- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
2869
2870Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
2871
2872- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
2873
2874Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
2875
2876- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
2877
2878Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
2879
2880- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
2881
2882Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
2883
2884Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
2885the corresponding single-line separators.
2886
2887+++
2888** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
2889
2890The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
2891`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
2892Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
2893that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
2894default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
2895default background is the background color of the frame, and the
2896default foreground is black.
2897
2898The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
2899(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
2900`ScrollBarBackground').
2901
2902Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
2903settings for scroll bar colors.
2904
2905+++
2906** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
2907display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
2908
2909---
2910** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
2911starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
2912on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
2913line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
2914the original window start.
2915
2916---
2917** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
2918`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
2919now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
2920
2921+++
2922** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
2923
2924A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
2925`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
2926windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
2927other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
2928
2929The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
2930fixed-width and fixed-height.
2931
2932 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
2933
2934A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
2935fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
2936window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
2937change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
2938temporarily to nil, for example
2939
2940 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
2941 (enlarge-window 10))
2942
79214ddf 2943Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
a933dad1 2944or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
e411ce4b
EZ
2945
2946** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
2947terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
2948to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
2949overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
2950horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
2951support a vertical-bar cursor).
e33b0397
DL
2952^L
2953* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
2954
2955** Not new, but not mentioned before:
2956M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
a933dad1
DL
2957\f
2958* Changes in Emacs 20.4
2959
2960** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
2961
2962You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
2963Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
2964`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
2965
2966If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
2967is the one that is used.
2968
2969** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
2970the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
2971Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
2972separate from the command's regular output.
2973Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
2974says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
2975In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
2976the buffer name.
2977
2978When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
2979output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
2980it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
2981cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
2982
2983** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
2984the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
2985is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
2986created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
2987
2988** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
2989example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
2990match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
2991quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
2992
2993** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
2994now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
2995if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
2996they never ignore case.
2997
2998** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
2999under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
3000applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
3001of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
3002just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
3003convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
3004part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
3005
3006If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
3007the same format that was used in the file before.
3008
3009You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
3010`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
3011
3012** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
3013renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
3014This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
3015
3016** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
3017The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
3018buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
3019your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
3020is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
3021end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
3022Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
3023
3024The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
3025eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
3026control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
3027format. You can now customize these variables.
3028
3029** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
3030filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
3031filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
3032enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
3033
3034** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
3035in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
3036windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
3037
3038** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
3039dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
3040doesn't have any effect.
3041
3042** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
3043not one per buffer.
3044
3045** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
3046use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
3047 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
3048
3049** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
3050To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
3051`auto-show-mode' command.
3052
3053** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
3054avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
3055versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
3056choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
3057occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
3058
3059** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
3060cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
3061
3062** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
3063character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
3064feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
3065
3066** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
3067the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
3068interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
3069and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
3070
3071** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
3072
3073The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
3074that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
3075one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
3076codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
3077set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
3078
3079Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
3080from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
3081
3082IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
3083equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
3084a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
3085`?' on other systems.
3086
3087IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
3088feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
3089Unix.
3090
3091Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
3092current codepage when it starts.
3093
3094** Mail changes
3095
feab4fba
GM
3096*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
3097`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
3098appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
3099non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
3100MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
3101headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
3102latin-1:
3103
3104 MIME-version: 1.0
3105 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
3106 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
3107
a933dad1
DL
3108*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
3109default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
3110default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
3111sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
3112buffer-file-coding-system.
3113
3114You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
3115sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
3116mail.
3117
3118*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
3119if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
3120Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
3121list of possible coding systems.
3122
3123** CC Mode changes
3124
3125*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
3126modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
3127longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
3128docstring for details.
3129
3130*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
3131symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
3132found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
3133prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
3134lineup functions use this feature currently.
3135
3136*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
3137"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
3138
3139*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
3140"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
3141
3142*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
3143from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
3144symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
3145c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
3146anonymous classes.
3147
3148*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
3149syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
3150
3151*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
3152inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
3153support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
3154function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
3155
3156*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
3157(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
3158brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
3159c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
3160(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
3161
3162*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
3163
3164*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
3165
3166*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
3167for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
3168
3169*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
3170
3171*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
3172associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
3173This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
3174circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
3175class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
3176
3177** Gnus changes.
3178
3179*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
3180added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
3181Gnus manual for the full story.
3182
3183*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
3184before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
3185group, which is created automatically.
3186
3187*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
3188values.
3189
3190*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
3191
3192*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
3193outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
3194
3195*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
3196`C-u C-c C-c'.
3197
3198*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
3199
3200*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
3201re-highlighting of the article buffer.
3202
3203*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
3204
3205*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
3206Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
3207
3208*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
3209`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
3210
3211*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
3212control over simplification.
3213
3214*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
3215
3216*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
3217limit.
3218
3219*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
3220
3221*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
3222
79214ddf 3223*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
a933dad1
DL
3224If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
3225rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
3226
3227*** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
3228`a' forces normal posting method.
3229
3230*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
3231-- `W d'.
3232
3233*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
3234to a non-nil value.
3235
3236*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
3237where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
3238
3239*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
3240has been added.
3241
3242*** A history of where mails have been split is available.
3243
3244*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
3245
3246*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
3247`gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
3248
3249*** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
3250`message-cite-original-without-signature'.
3251
3252*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
3253
3254*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
3255been added.
3256
3257*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
3258`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
3259
3260*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
3261updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
3262
3263*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
3264
3265*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
3266
3267*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
3268
3269** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
3270
3271*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
3272options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
3273nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
3274
3275*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
3276TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
3277of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
3278TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
3279can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
3280
3281*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
3282All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
3283but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
3284the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
3285
3286*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
3287the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
3288buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
3289mismatch.
3290
3291** Changes to RefTeX mode
3292
3293*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
3294file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
3295
3296*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
3297lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
3298characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
3299removed from the label.
3300
3301*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
3302a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
3303
3304*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
3305customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
3306
3307*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
3308`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
79214ddf 3309expressions.
a933dad1
DL
3310
3311*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
3312
3313** New/deleted modes and packages
3314
3315*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
3316SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
3317
3318*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
3319editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
3320SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
3321
3322*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
3323changes with a special face.
3324
3325*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
3326this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
3327Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
3328\f
3329* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
3330
3331** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
3332This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
3333conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
3334and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
3335check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
3336
3337The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
3338Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
3339distribution when the config.bat script is run.
3340
3341** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
3342MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
3343controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
3344directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
3345Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
3346on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
3347string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
3348program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
3349printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
3350
3351** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
3352output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
3353available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
3354input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
3355temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
3356program.
3357
3358An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
3359and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
3360programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
3361automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
3362as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
3363ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
3364
3365** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
3366a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
3367MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
3368was not documented clearly before.
3369
3370** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
3371This includes Tetris and Snake.
3372\f
3373* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
3374
3375** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
3376return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
3377They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
3378meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
3379
3380** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
3381WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
3382and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
3383
3384** Changes in the file-attributes function.
3385
3386*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
3387It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
3388
3389*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
3390the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
3391integers.
3392
3393** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
3394files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
3395arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
3396file names and attributes are returned.
3397
3398** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
3399sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
3400accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
3401It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
3402returns the result.
3403
3404** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
3405to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
3406
3407** New functions for base64 conversion:
3408
3409The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
3410into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
3411performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
3412optionally.
3413
3414Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
3415job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
3416
3417**
3418The new function process-running-child-p
3419will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
3420terminal to its own child process.
3421
3422** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
3423when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
3424to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
3425itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
3426
3427** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
3428be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
3429
3430** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
3431:included is an alias for :visible.
3432
3433easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
3434easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
3435to move or copy menu entries.
3436
3437** Multibyte editing changes
3438
3439*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
3440an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
3441make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
3442work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
3443char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
3444 (setq char (sref str idx)
3445 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
3446The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
3447
3448If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
3449(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
3450 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
3451
3452*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
3453region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
3454deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
3455
3456 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
3457
3458This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
3459across the boundary.
3460
3461*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
3462`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
3463 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
3464 contains 8-bit characters.
3465 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
3466 contains invalid characters.
3467
3468*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
3469text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
3470preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
3471text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
3472way.
3473
3474*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
3475If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
3476end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
3477prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
3478
3479*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
3480compose Thai characters in a string.
3481
3482** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
3483argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
3484for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
3485menus should always use the third argument.
3486
3487** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
3488read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
3489arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
3490input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
3491
3492** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
3493of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
3494programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
3495inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
3496
3497** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
3498the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
3499returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
3500echo area contents.
3501
3502 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
3503
3504** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
3505NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
3506requested feature cannot be loaded.
3507
3508** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
3509foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
79214ddf 3510means to clear out that attribute.
a933dad1
DL
3511
3512** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
3513gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
3514
3515** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
3516read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
3517unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
3518end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
3519
3520** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
3521the gap of the current buffer.
3522
3523** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
3524to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
3525current buffer.
3526
3527** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
3528facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
3529These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
3530it back in after any modifications have been made.
3531\f
3532* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
3533
3534** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
3535the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
3536/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
3537directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
3538subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
3539
3540Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
3541names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
3542Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
3543which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
3544these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
3545
3546Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
3547starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
3548time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
3549
3550This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
3551Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
3552to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
3553subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
3554`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
3555results.
3556
3557** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
3558GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
3559that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
3560fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
3561\f
3562* Changes in Emacs 20.3
3563
3564** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
3565including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
3566it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
3567perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
3568
3569** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
3570specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
3571region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
3572further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
3573command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
3574within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
3575are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
3576region.
3577
3578In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
3579selective undo.
3580
3581** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
3582unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
3583buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
3584effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
3585Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
3586
3587The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
3588though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
3589-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
3590load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
3591
3592** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
3593no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
3594enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
3595something that most users not do.
3596
3597** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
3598operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
3599The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
3600applications.
3601
3602C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
3603pasting operations.
3604
3605** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
3606setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
3607like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
3608printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
3609`ps-printer-name'.
3610
3611** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
3612minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
3613any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
3614except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
3615incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
3616hits a new word.
3617
3618Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
3619Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
3620to be confused by TeX commands.
3621
3622You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
3623correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
3624clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
3625of various alternative replacements and actions.
3626
3627Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
3628the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
3629corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
3630alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
3631flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
3632
3633Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
3634flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
3635
3636** Changes in input method usage.
3637
3638Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
3639the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
3640respectively.
3641
3642You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
3643
3644If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
3645of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
3646
3647The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
3648that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
3649
3650 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
3651
3652 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
3653
3654 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
3655 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
3656
3657 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
79214ddf 3658 given in the following case:
a933dad1
DL
3659 o When you are using a complex input method.
3660 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
3661
3662If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
3663input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
3664and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
3665setting it to t is helpful.
3666
3667The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
3668
3669In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
3670keys:
3671 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
3672 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
3673 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
3674These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
3675environment.
3676
3677** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
3678names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
3679minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
3680get
3681
3682 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
3683
3684which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
3685
3686Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
3687Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
3688
3689** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
3690at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
3691its owner and group.
3692
3693** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
3694Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
3695
3696** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
3697contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
3698
3699** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
3700which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
3701in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
3702by the left edge of the rectangle.
3703
3704** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
3705increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
3706C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
3707for writing keyboard macros.
3708
3709** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
3710files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
3711frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
3712the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
3713additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
3714info.
3715
3716** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
3717
3718** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
3719query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
3720contents only.
3721
3722** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
3723confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
3724the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
3725says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
3726
3727** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
3728non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
3729literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
3730
3731** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
3732now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
3733Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
3734inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
3735
3736** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
3737failure if the command produces no output.
3738
3739** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
3740manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
3741the mouse.
3742
3743** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
3744mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
3745function and variable names.
3746
3747** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
3748reading specific files. This has higher priority than
3749file-coding-system-alist.
3750
3751** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
3752t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
3753converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
3754the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
3755according to the current fontset.
3756
3757** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
3758
3759The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
3760that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
3761nonascii-insert-offset.
3762
3763For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
3764enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
3765nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
3766characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
3767
3768** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
3769an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
3770
3771** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
3772letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
3773
3774** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
3775are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
3776command keys.
3777
3778** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
3779user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
3780
3781Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
3782user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
3783all variables that have documentation.
3784
3785** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
3786shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
3787that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
3788minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
3789it should show; the default is 20.
3790
3791Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
3792the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
3793of your input.
3794
3795** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
3796all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
3797recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
3798argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
3799the customizable options which were changed since that version.
3800Newly added options are included as well.
3801
3802If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
3803then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
3804for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
3805
3806This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
3807Customize menu.
3808
3809** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
3810the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
3811
3812** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
3813buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
3814invoked.
3815
3816** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
3817that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
3818The default is 1.
3819
3820** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
3821syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
3822new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
3823(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
3824sensibly.
3825
3826** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
3827
3828** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
3829value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
3830two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
3831
3832** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
3833reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
3834for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
3835every night.
3836
7464346d
GM
3837** Desktop changes
3838
3839*** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
a933dad1
DL
3840the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
3841
7464346d
GM
3842*** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
3843and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
3844
a933dad1
DL
3845** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
3846read and post multi-lingual articles.
3847
3848** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
3849doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
3850be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
3851outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
3852the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
79214ddf 3853made invisible again.
a933dad1
DL
3854
3855** Mail reading and sending changes
3856
3857*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
3858the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
3859changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
3860toggle.
3861
3862*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
3863now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
3864summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
3865the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
3866rmail-default-body-file.
3867
3868*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
3869longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
3870handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
3871
3872*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
3873it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
3874is evaluated to insert the signature.
3875
3876*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
3877outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
3878handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
3879putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
3880transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
3881especially interested in trying feedmail.
3882
3883feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
3884feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
3885provided by feedmail are:
3886
3887**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
3888stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
3889there is also a queue for draft messages
3890
3891**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
3892be prompted for confirmation
3893
3894**** does smart filling of address headers
3895
3896**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
3897the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
3898can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
3899
3900**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
3901the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
3902/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
3903function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
3904
3905** Dired changes
3906
3907*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
3908files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
3909
3910*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
3911run Dired on the directory name at point.
3912
3913*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
3914files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
3915for a specified regexp.
3916
3917** VC Changes
3918
3919*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
3920conveniently.
3921
3922*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
3923faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
3924Dired.
3925
3926VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
3927directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
3928listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
3929currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
3930
3931You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
3932then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
3933vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
3934control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
3935on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
3936
3937All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
3938is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
3939`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
3940the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
3941`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
3942
3943The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
3944toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
79214ddf 3945VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
a933dad1
DL
3946`* l', to mark all files currently locked.
3947
3948Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
3949ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
3950command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
3951
3952*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
3953file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
3954session to resolve them.
3955
3956Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
3957resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
3958contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
3959uses as well).
3960
3961*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
3962command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
3963you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
3964either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
3965branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
3966If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
3967using ediff.
3968
3969** Changes in Font Lock
3970
3971*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
3972are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
3973use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
3974unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
3975compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
3976
3977** Frame name display changes
3978
3979*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
3980frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
3981raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
3982when many frames are invisible or iconified.
3983
3984*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
3985frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
3986menu.
3987
3988** Comint (subshell) changes
3989
3990*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
3991subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
3992with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
3993
3994*** There are new commands in Comint mode.
3995
3996C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
3997that is, the line after the last line you got.
3998You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
3999
4000C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
4001send the current line together with the following line, when you send
4002the following line.
4003
4004C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
4005which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
4006previously sent input.
4007
4008C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
4009it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
4010as the search string.
4011
4012*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
4013automatically in compilation-mode windows.
4014
4015** C mode changes
4016
4017*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
4018and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
4019assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
79214ddf 4020definition.
a933dad1
DL
4021
4022*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
4023(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
4024Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
4025style is still the default however.
4026
4027*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
4028
4029*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
4030are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
4031them. They do not have key bindings by default.
4032
4033*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
4034and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
4035
4036*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
4037namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
4038
4039*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
4040makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
4041
4042*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
4043c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
4044
4045*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
4046should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
4047package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
4048variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
4049
4050** Changes to hippie-expand.
4051
79214ddf 4052*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
a933dad1
DL
4053non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
4054which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
4055
4056*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
4057non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
4058expanding dynamically.
4059
4060*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
4061non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
4062
4063*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
4064non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
4065this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
4066expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
4067
4068*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
4069
4070** Changes in BibTeX mode.
4071
4072*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
4073bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
4074automatic key generation. This replaces variable
4075bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
4076against the first word in the title.
4077
4078*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
4079capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
4080bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
79214ddf 4081lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
a933dad1 4082lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
79214ddf 4083bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
a933dad1
DL
4084
4085*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
4086generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
4087replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
4088bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
4089
4090** Changes in vcursor.el.
4091
4092*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
4093and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
4094variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
4095entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
4096`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
4097in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
4098
4099*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
4100Editing group once the package is loaded.
4101
4102*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
4103generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
4104vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
4105
4106*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
4107vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
4108
4109** Ispell changes.
4110
79214ddf
FP
4111*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
4112buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
a933dad1
DL
4113are identified by syntax tables in effect.
4114
4115*** Generic region skipping implemented.
4116A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
4117and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
4118defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
79214ddf 4119include:
a933dad1
DL
4120
4121 o URLs are automatically skipped
4122 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
4123
4124*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
4125
4126** Changes to RefTeX mode
4127
4128RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
4129large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
4130re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
4131section `Optimizations' in the manual.
4132
4133*** New recursive parser.
4134
4135The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
4136entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
4137recursive parser scans the individual files.
4138
4139*** Parsing only part of a document.
79214ddf 4140
a933dad1
DL
4141Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
4142partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
4143the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
4144
4145 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
4146
4147*** Storing parsing information in a file.
4148
4149This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
4150
4151 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
4152
4153*** Using multiple selection buffers
4154
4155If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
4156for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
4157
4158 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
4159
4160*** References to external documents.
4161
4162The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
4163documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
4164documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
4165macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
4166RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
4167the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
4168The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
4169
4170*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
4171
4172The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
4173and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
4174
4175Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
4176the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
4177
4178*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
4179
4180The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
4181buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
4182
4183*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
4184
4185The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
4186contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
4187`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
4188have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
4189enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
4190at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
4191more.
4192
4193*** Support for the varioref package
4194
4195The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
4196
4197*** New hooks
4198
4199Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
4200and citations are created. These hooks are
4201`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
4202`reftex-format-cite-function'.
4203
4204*** Citations outside LaTeX
4205
4206The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
4207a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
4208
4209*** Short context is no longer fontified.
4210
4211The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
4212fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
4213fontified, use
4214
4215 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
4216
4217** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
4218With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
4219the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
4220directories that contain the same file name.
4221
4222Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
4223Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
4224file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
4225Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
4226have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
4227names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
4228directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
4229directory.
4230
4231** New modes and packages
4232
4233*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
4234It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
4235it, but some do not.
4236
4237*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
4238code.
4239
4240*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
4241current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
4242around in a buffer.
4243
4244Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
4245
4246*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
4247uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
4248be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
4249established system of notation similar to Chess.
4250
4251*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
4252documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
4253guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
4254
4255*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
4256available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
4257system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
4258simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
4259functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
4260the like.
4261
4262*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
4263identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
4264
4265*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
4266within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
4267used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
4268the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
4269
4270*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
4271
4272 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
4273 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
4274 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
4275 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
4276 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
4277 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
4278 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
4279 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
4280 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
4281 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
4282 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
4283
4284 Platform-specific modes:
4285
4286 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
4287 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
4288 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
4289 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
4290 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
4291 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
4292 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
4293 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
4294 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
4295\f
4296* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
4297
4298** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
4299use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
4300That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
4301Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
4302
4303Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
4304you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
4305consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
4306
4307** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
4308and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
4309specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
4310searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
4311
4312** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
4313multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
4314character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
4315environment.
4316
4317** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
4318take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
4319string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
4320current input method for reading this one event.
4321
4322** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
4323now control whether to output certain characters as
4324backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
4325non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
4326characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
4327in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
4328\f
4329* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
4330
4331** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
4332of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
4333
4334** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
4335in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
4336always increases point by 1.
4337
4338The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
4339considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
4340
4341See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
4342
4343** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
4344Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
4345default value changed. For example,
4346
4347 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
4348 :type 'integer
4349 :group 'foo
4350 :version "20.3")
4351
79214ddf 4352 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
a933dad1
DL
4353 :version "20.3")
4354
4355If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
4356default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
4357is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
4358`:version' in the top level group.
4359
4360This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
4361
4362** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
4363starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
4364
4365However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
4366symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
4367support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
4368to themselves.
4369
4370If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
4371this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
4372values whatever.
4373
4374** There is a new debugger command, R.
4375It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
4376in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
4377
4378** Frame-local variables.
4379
4380You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
4381the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
4382local bindings for that variable.
4383
4384These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
4385frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
4386modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
4387parameter name.
4388
4389Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
4390Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
4391active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
4392that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
4393
4394It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
4395clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
4396very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
4397through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
4398
4399** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
4400"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
4401evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
4402makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
4403See the documentation in sregex.el.
4404
4405** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
4406is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
4407parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
4408The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
4409
4410** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
4411If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
4412
4413** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
4414known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
4415define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
4416
4417** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
4418when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
4419it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
4420history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
4421
4422The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
4423return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
4424empty input.
4425
4426** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
4427for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
4428`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
4429Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
4430`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
4431
4432** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
4433echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
4434a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
4435default password to use if the user enters nothing.
4436
4437** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
4438specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
4439function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
4440place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
4441non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
4442
4443** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
4444If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
4445up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
4446end of the window, even if this requires computation.
4447
4448** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
4449which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
4450If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
4451
4452** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
4453holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
4454was directed to display this buffer.
4455
4456** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
4457with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
4458describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
4459other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
4460set-window-configuration.
4461
4462** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
4463window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
4464positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
4465windows and the choice of buffers to display.
4466
4467** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
4468override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
4469look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
4470
4471If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
4472non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
4473map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
4474
4475minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
4476and it is meant to be set by major modes.
4477
4478** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
4479except that it discards all text properties from the result.
4480
4481** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
4482USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
4483floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
4484
4485** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
4486to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
4487in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
4488it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
4489
4490** Menu changes
4491
4492*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
4493keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
4494better supported.
4495
4496The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
4497a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
4498you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
4499can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
4500then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
4501
4502*** A new format for menu items is supported.
4503
4504In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
4505 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
4506defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
4507starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
4508
4509The format is:
4510 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
4511 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
4512where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
4513string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
4514The supported properties include
4515
4516:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
4517 item is enabled.
4518:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
4519 item should appear in the menu.
79214ddf 4520:filter FILTER-FN
a933dad1
DL
4521 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
4522 which will be REAL-BINDING.
4523 It should return a binding to use instead.
4524:keys DESCRIPTION
4525 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
4526 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
4527 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
4528:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
4529 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
4530 keyboard binding.
4531:key-sequence nil
4532 This means that the command normally has no
4533 keyboard equivalent.
4534:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
4535:button (TYPE . SELECTED)
4536 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
4537 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
4538 value says whether this button is currently selected.
4539
4540Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
4541Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
4542
4543(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
4544
4545** New event types
4546
4547*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
4548mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
4549corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
4550which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
4551
4552 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
4553
4554where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
4555same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
4556indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
4557negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
4558the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
4559forward, away from the user.
4560
4561As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
4562
4563*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
4564files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
4565and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
4566filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
4567loaded into Emacs. The format is:
4568
4569 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
4570
4571where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
4572same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
4573that were dragged and dropped.
4574
4575As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
4576
4577** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
4578
4579*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
4580any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
4581to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
4582
4583*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
4584can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
4585that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
4586
4587*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
4588in Emacs 19 and before.
4589
4590The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
4591The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
4592
4593*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
4594buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
4595unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
4596representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
4597
4598This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
4599as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
4600viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
4601one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
4602will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
4603
4604This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
4605representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
4606(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
4607consistent with the new representation.
4608
4609*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
4610representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
4611about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
4612however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
4613
4614The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
4615nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
4616using the table nonascii-translation-table.
4617
4618*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
4619representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
4620representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
4621
4622The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
4623loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
4624is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
4625
4626*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
4627which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
4628
4629*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
4630which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
4631
4632*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
4633portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
4634so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
4635You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
4636
4637*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
4638it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
4639
4640*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
4641convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
4642buffer or string being searched.
4643
4644One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
4645[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
4646searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
4647searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
4648obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
4649you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
4650expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
4651
4652*** Structure of coding system changed.
4653
4654All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
4655by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
4656which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
4657as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
4658vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
4659your own alias name of a coding system by the function
4660define-coding-system-alias.
4661
4662The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
4663the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
4664access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
4665pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
4666character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
4667safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
4668'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
4669`iso-8859-1'.
4670
4671Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
4672The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
4673coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
4674(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
4675
4676Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
4677also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
4678are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
4679the other character sets and read it back correctly.
4680
4681*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
4682proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
4683This function requires a user interaction.
4684
4685*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
4686find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
4687select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
4688systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
4689a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
4690select-safe-coding-system.
4691
4692*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
4693decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
4694last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
4695was done.
4696
4697*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
4698used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
4699coding systems used by some specific language environment.
4700
4701*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
4702return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
4703characters are found, they now return a list of single element
4704`undecided' or its subsidiaries.
4705
4706*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
4707coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
4708coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
4709converted.
4710
4711*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
4712coding system for communicating with other X clients.
4713
4714*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
4715character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
4716character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
4717each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
4718either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
4719range of characters.
4720
4721*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
4722Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
4723
4724*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
4725in the current buffer at position POS.
4726
4727*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
4728input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
4729function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
4730character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
4731event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
4732binding input-method-function to nil.
4733
4734The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
4735method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
4736input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
4737the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
4738not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
4739
4740The input method function is not called when reading the second and
4741subsequent events of a key sequence.
4742
4743*** You can customize any language environment by using
4744set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
4745
4746The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
4747customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
4748instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
4749environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
4750exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
4751\f
4752* Changes in Emacs 20.1
4753
4754** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
4755options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
4756at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
4757tree structure.
4758
4759M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
4760user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
4761
4762With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
4763session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
4764in your .emacs file.)
4765
4766** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
4767You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
4768
4769** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
4770This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
4771
4772** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
4773immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
4774kills the region.
4775
4776The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
4777delete the character before point, as usual.
4778
4779** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
4780on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
4781by setting search-highlight to nil.)
4782
4783** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
4784insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
4785the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
4786onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
4787history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
4788past.)
4789
4790** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
4791This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
4792in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
4793TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
4794makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
4795
4796As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
4797and is an alias for it.
4798
4799If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
4800use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
4801
4802** Scrolling changes
4803
4804*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
4805position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
4806
4807In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
4808on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
4809where it started.
4810
4811*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
4812move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
4813screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
4814does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
4815
4816*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
4817top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
4818comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
4819recenters the window.
4820
4821** International character set support (MULE)
4822
4823Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
4824including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
4825Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
4826Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
4827features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
4828MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
4829
4830Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
4831coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
4832character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
4833variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
4834into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
4835
4836Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
4837generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
4838supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
4839language, to make it possible to type them.
4840
4841The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
4842character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
4843
4844The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
4845to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
4846
4847You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
4848
4849 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
4850
4851Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
4852characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
4853argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
4854already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
4855characters for their work until they want to change.
4856
4857*** Input methods
4858
4859An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
4860specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
4861has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
4862the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
4863support several input methods.
4864
4865The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
4866another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
4867work.
4868
4869A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
4870characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
4871composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
4872consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
4873sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
4874letter.
4875
4876The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
4877by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
4878First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
4879marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
4880mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
4881
4882None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
4883they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
4884phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
4885converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
4886
4887Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
4888word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
4889typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
4890the first guess is wrong.
4891
4892*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
4893turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
4894
4895If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
4896byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
4897they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
4898the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
4899
4900However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
4901use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
4902includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
4903translate automatically to and from either one.
4904
4905*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
4906
4907Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
4908file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
4909sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
4910what you want.
4911
4912If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
4913example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
4914system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
4915multibyte characters in that buffer.
4916
4917If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
4918character conversion as well.
4919
4920*** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
4921
4922A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
4923Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
4924requires using many fonts.
4925
4926Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
4927collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
4928
4929A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
4930the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
4931have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
4932you would use a font.
4933
4934If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
4935specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
4936display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
4937
4938The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
4939(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
4940characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
4941or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
4942and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
4943
4944*** Defining fontsets.
4945
4946Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
4947chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
4948with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
4949
4950Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
4951of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
4952`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
4953standard fontset are created automatically.
4954
4955If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
4956argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
4957FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
4958with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
4959name is `fontset-startup'.
4960
4961Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
4962The resource value should have this form:
4963 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
4964FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
4965 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
4966 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
4967 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
4968The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
4969of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
4970CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
4971FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
4972
4973Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
4974last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
4975You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
4976
4977For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
4978font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
4979following resource,
4980 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
4981the font for ASCII is generated as below:
4982 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
4983Here is the substitution rule:
4984 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
4985 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
4986 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
4987 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
4988 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
4989
4990The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
4991fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
4992that function explicitly to create a fontset.
4993
4994With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
4995like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
4996name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
4997fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
4998fontsets.
4999
5000*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
5001defaults for a particular choice of language.
5002
5003Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
5004method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
5005visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
5006already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
5007language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
5008system for new files that you create.
5009
5010It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
5011set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
5012whole Emacs session.
5013
5014For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
5015chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
5016with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
5017
5018*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
5019specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
5020specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
5021the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
5022coding systems that Emacs supports.
5023
5024*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
5025lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
5026This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
5027After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
5028is used for *the immediately following command*.
5029
5030So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
5031write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
5032
5033If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
5034then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
5035
5036For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
5037visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
5038
5039*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
5040construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
5041to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
5042specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
5043of the file.
5044
5045*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
5046the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
5047code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
5048translated into that character code.
5049
5050This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
5051various countries to support the languages of those countries.
5052
5053By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
5054
5055*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
5056the coding system for keyboard input.
5057
5058Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
5059with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
5060some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
5061
5062By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
5063
5064Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
5065input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
5066translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
5067to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
5068designed to work with terminals.
5069
5070*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
5071specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
5072This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
5073has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
5074translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
5075in the corresponding buffer.
5076
5077By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
5078
5079*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
5080to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
5081It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
5082
5083*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
5084an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
5085command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
5086want to use.
5087
5088C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
5089method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
5090
5091*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
5092layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
5093remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
5094which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
5095
5096*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
5097the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
5098related information.
5099
5100*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
5101HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
5102scripts.
5103
5104*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
5105information about the support for a particular language.
5106You specify the language as an argument.
5107
5108*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
5109the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
5110first dash.
5111
5112A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
5113(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
5114whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
51151 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
5116
5117 A alternativnyj (Russian)
5118 B big5 (Chinese)
5119 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
5120 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
5121 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
5122 E euc-japan (Japanese)
5123 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
5124 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
5125 K euc-korea (Korean)
5126 R koi8 (Russian)
5127 Q tibetan
5128 S shift_jis (Japanese)
5129 T lao
5130 T tis620 (Thai)
5131 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
5132 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
5133 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
5134 v viqr (Vietnamese)
5135 z hz (Chinese)
5136
5137When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
5138two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
5139coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
5140keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
5141
5142*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
5143conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
5144
5145When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
5146into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
5147rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
5148Rmail files themselves.
5149
5150*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
5151conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
5152
5153Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
5154for sending mail:
5155
5156- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
5157- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
5158- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
5159 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
5160- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
5161
5162*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
5163to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
5164Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
5165translations.
5166
5167** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
5168of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
5169insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
5170without any conversion.
5171
5172** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
5173You can now specify any number of octal digits.
5174RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
5175any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
5176
5177** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
5178functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
5179
5180Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
5181Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
5182
5183Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
5184mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
5185
5186** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
5187complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
5188in the buffer before point.
5189
5190With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
5191symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
5192you are using.
5193
5194With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
5195just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
5196
5197** File locking works with NFS now.
5198
5199The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
5200in the same directory as FILENAME.
5201
5202This means that collision detection between two different machines now
5203works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
5204can become a bottleneck.
5205
5206The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
5207does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
5208create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
5209file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
5210rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
5211so useful that the change is worth while.
5212
5213When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
5214are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
5215collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
5216tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
5217
5218** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
5219it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
5220show-paren-mode.
5221
5222** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
5223selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
5224delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
5225
5226** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
5227within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
5228complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
5229
5230** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
5231it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
5232set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
5233
5234** Changes in View mode.
5235
5236*** Several new commands are available in View mode.
5237Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
5238
5239*** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
5240view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
5241
5242*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
5243previous state.
5244
5245*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
5246scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
5247
5248*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
5249non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
5250not just the selected window.
5251
5252*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
5253read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
5254turns View mode on or off.
5255
5256*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
5257how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
5258delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
5259
5260** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
5261now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
5262
5263** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
5264has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
5265presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
5266which version to compare with.
5267
5268** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
79214ddf 5269blocks if a match is inside the block.
a933dad1
DL
5270
5271The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
5272is outside the block. By customizing the variable
5273isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
5274shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
5275
5276By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
5277of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
5278blocks, all of them or none.
5279
5280** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
5281current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
5282confirmation first.
5283
5284** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
5285now changes the major mode according to that file name.
5286However, the mode will not be changed if
5287(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
5288(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
5289 not suitable for ordinary files, or
5290(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
5291
5292This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
5293
5294However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
5295these commands do not change the major mode.
5296
5297** M-x occur changes.
5298
5299*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
5300it performs a case-sensitive search.
5301
5302*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
5303if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
5304using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
5305
5306** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
5307in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
5308window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
5309that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
5310buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
5311
5312** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
5313after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
5314appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
5315come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
5316
5317** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
5318selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
5319buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
5320
5321** Outline mode changes.
5322
5323*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
5324
5325*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
5326
5327** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
5328you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
5329Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
5330was already active.
5331
5332The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
5333unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
5334get confused by it.
5335
5336If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
5337set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
5338
5339** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
5340
5341*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
5342conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
5343character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
5344including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
5345
5346The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
5347mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
5348copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
5349
5350*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
5351are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
5352values.
5353
5354`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
5355case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
5356`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
5357case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
5358
5359** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
5360certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
5361can be. The default value is 30.
5362
5363** Changes in Mail mode.
5364
5365*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
5366Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
5367composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
5368`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
5369`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
5370behavior.
5371
5372C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
5373compose-mail-other-frame.
5374
5375*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
5376the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
5377replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
5378buffer that shows the original message.
5379
5380*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
5381with separator lines around the contents.
5382
5383*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
5384in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
5385definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
5386need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
5387
5388*** New features in the mail-complete command.
5389
5390**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
5391for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
5392controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
5393Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
5394
5395**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
5396to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
5397/etc/passwd.
5398
5399**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
5400to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
5401/etc/passwd.
5402
5403** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
5404special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
5405directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
5406reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
5407
5408Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
5409when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
5410be taken to be magic.
5411
5412** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
5413files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
5414available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
5415
5416M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
5417(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
5418
5419** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
5420suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
5421
5422In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
5423
5424new key dired.el binding old key
5425------- ---------------- -------
5426 * c dired-change-marks c
5427 * m dired-mark m
5428 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
5429 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
5430 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
5431 * u dired-unmark u
5432 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
5433 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
5434 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
5435 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
5436 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
5437 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
5438
5439** Rmail changes.
5440
5441*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
5442saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
5443chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
5444each time you run it.
5445
5446*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
5447whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
5448
5449*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
5450messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
5451means to move in the opposite direction.
5452
5453*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
5454you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
5455
5456*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
5457just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
5458It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
5459can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
5460for output.
5461
5462** Gnus changes.
5463
5464*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
5465
79214ddf
FP
5466*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
5467Gnus.
a933dad1 5468
79214ddf 5469*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
a933dad1
DL
5470`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
5471
5472*** Article washing status can be displayed in the
5473article mode line.
5474
5475*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
5476
5477*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
5478
5479(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
5480
5481*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
5482are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
5483`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
5484
5485*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
5486
5487*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
5488
5489*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
5490See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
5491
5492*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
5493Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
5494used to pick articles.
5495
5496*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
5497another have been added.
5498
5499 `M-x gnus-change-server'
5500
5501*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
5502generating lines in buffers.
5503
5504*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
5505`M-C-_'.
5506
5507*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
5508
5509*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
5510
5511 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
5512
5513*** Scores can be decayed.
79214ddf 5514
a933dad1
DL
5515 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
5516
5517*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
5518Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
5519
5520*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
5521the native server.
5522
5523 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
5524
5525*** A new command for reading collections of documents
5526(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
5527
5528*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
5529
5530*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
5531even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
5532
5533*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
5534(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
5535
5536 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
5537 a group.
5538
5539*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
5540sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
5541
5542 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
5543
5544*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
5545
5546 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
5547
5548*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
79214ddf 5549
a933dad1
DL
5550 Use the `Y c' command.
5551
5552*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
5553
5554*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
5555
5556 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
5557
5558*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
5559from incoming mail before saving the mail.
79214ddf 5560
a933dad1
DL
5561 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
5562
5563*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
5564
5565*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
5566the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
5567
5568 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
5569
5570Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
5571and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
5572from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
5573hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
5574this issue.)
5575
5576Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
5577automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
5578particular news group. This can be done by:
5579
5580 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
5581
5582Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
5583of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
5584"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
5585system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
5586for reading and posting).
5587
5588CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
5589 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
5590Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
5591newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
5592there.
5593
5594Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
5595default. Here are some of these default settings:
5596
5597 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
5598 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
5599 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
5600 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
5601 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
5602
5603When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
5604the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
5605
5606** CC mode changes.
5607
5608*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
5609code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
5610values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
5611this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
5612Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
5613loaded.
5614
5615If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
79214ddf 5616Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
a933dad1 5617style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
79214ddf
FP
5618share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
5619c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
a933dad1
DL
5620must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
5621
5622*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
5623of the current buffer.
5624
5625*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
5626it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
5627of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
5628
5629*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
5630style that the Python developers like.
5631
5632*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
5633This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
5634just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
5635
5636** VC Changes [new]
5637
5638** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
5639name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
5640directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
5641
5642This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
5643master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
5644developers.
5645
5646You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
5647RET in a buffer visiting that file.
5648
5649*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
5650other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
5651writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
5652calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
5653
5654*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
5655version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
5656
5657** Calendar changes.
5658
5659A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
5660of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
5661for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
5662
5663** ps-print changes
5664
79214ddf 5665There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
a933dad1
DL
5666
5667*** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
5668
5669The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
5670formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
5671`a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
5672`ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
5673It defaults to `letter'.
5674If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
5675
5676The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
79214ddf 5677of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
a933dad1
DL
5678non-nil means "landscape" mode.
5679
5680The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
5681It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
79214ddf 5682It defaults to 1.
a933dad1
DL
5683
5684*** Horizontal layout
5685
5686The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
5687`ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
5688All are measured in points.
5689
5690*** Vertical layout
5691
5692The vertical layout is determined by the variables
5693`ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
5694All are measured in points.
5695
5696*** Headers
5697
5698If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
5699`ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
5700margin above the text.
5701
79214ddf 5702If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
a933dad1
DL
5703framing box is printed around the header.
5704
5705The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
5706`ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
5707
79214ddf
FP
5708The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
5709`ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
a933dad1
DL
5710`ps-header-font-size'.
5711
5712*** Font managing
5713
5714The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
5715used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
5716`ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
5717elements to this alist.
5718
79214ddf 5719The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
a933dad1
DL
5720for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
5721
5722** hideshow changes.
5723
5724*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
79214ddf 5725C++, ; for lisp).
a933dad1
DL
5726
5727*** Support for java-mode added.
5728
5729*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
5730in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
5731
5732*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
5733the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
5734way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
5735
5736*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
5737robust and a lot faster.
5738
79214ddf 5739*** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
a933dad1
DL
5740
5741*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
5742to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
5743documentation for more details.
5744
5745** Changes in Enriched mode.
5746
5747*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
5748filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
5749of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
5750use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
5751the next time unless the fill-column is different.
5752
5753*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
5754distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
5755as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
5756as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
5757
5758** Font Lock mode
5759
5760*** Custom support
5761
5762The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
5763font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
5764faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
5765group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
5766your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
5767consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
5768
5769You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
5770
5771*** Maximum decoration
5772
5773Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
5774default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
5775of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
5776supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
5777to get the old behavior.
5778
5779*** New support
5780
5781Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
5782
5783Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
5784support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
5785
5786*** Configurable support
5787
5788Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
5789additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
5790c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
5791java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
5792list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
5793of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
5794convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
5795
5796Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
5797way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
5798it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
5799
5800*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
5801
5802You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
5803highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
5804for any mode.
5805
5806For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
5807
5808 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
5809
5810in your ~/.emacs.
5811
5812*** New faces
5813
5814Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
5815font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
5816distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
5817to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
5818
5819*** Changes to fast-lock support mode
5820
5821The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
5822cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
5823same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
5824
5825*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
5826
5827The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
5828according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
5829the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
5830non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
5831refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
5832the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
5833Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
5834
5835This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
5836For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
5837this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
5838refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
5839containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
5840the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
5841
5842As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
5843
5844Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
5845Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
5846Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
5847new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
5848
5849If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
5850settings.
5851
5852** Ada mode changes.
5853
5854*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
5855If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
5856procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
5857you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
5858stubs.
5859
5860*** There are two new commands:
5861 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
5862 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
5863
5864The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
5865`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
79214ddf 5866`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
a933dad1
DL
5867
5868*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
5869is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
5870Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
5871
5872*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
5873formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
5874places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
5875space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
5876
5877** Scheme mode changes.
5878
5879*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
5880mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
5881for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
5882with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
5883have any effect.
5884
5885If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
5886still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
5887scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
5888variables as buffer-local variables.
5889
5890*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
5891Use M-x dsssl-mode.
5892
133c9e59
GM
5893** Changes to the emacsclient program
5894
875c1439
GM
5895*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
5896USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
5897associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
5898can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
5899
133c9e59 5900*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
a933dad1
DL
5901it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
5902buffer in Emacs.
5903
133c9e59
GM
5904*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
5905use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
5906ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
5907option takes precedence.
5908
a933dad1
DL
5909** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
5910constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
5911(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
5912
5913** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
5914which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
5915the current defun.
5916
5917** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
5918following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
5919
5920** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
5921and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
5922necessary).
5923
5924** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
5925if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
5926these register values no longer become completely useless.
5927If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
5928asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
5929it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
5930
5931** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
5932example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
5933be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
5934you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
5935
5936You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
5937variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
5938file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
5939revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
5940only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
5941
5942** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
5943since it applies only to the current frame.
5944
5945** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
5946file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
5947and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
5948
5949This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
5950multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
5951variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
5952tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
5953instead of just the file you are editing.
5954
5955** RefTeX mode
5956
5957RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
5958and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
5959different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
5960multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
5961turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
5962
79214ddf 5963C-c ( reftex-label
a933dad1
DL
5964 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
5965 knows which kind of label is needed.
5966
5967C-c ) reftex-reference
5968 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
5969 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
5970
5971C-c [ reftex-citation
5972 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
5973 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
5974
5975C-c & reftex-view-crossref
5976 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
5977
5978C-c = reftex-toc
5979 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
5980 can quickly jump to every section.
79214ddf 5981
a933dad1
DL
5982Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
5983commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
5984Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
5985reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
5986C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
5987
5988** Changes in BibTeX mode.
5989
5990*** Info documentation is now available.
5991
5992*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
5993both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
5994
5995*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
5996bibtex-user-optional-fields.
5997
5998*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
5999(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
6000
6001*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
6002entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
6003appropriate functions.
6004
6005*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
6006entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
6007
6008*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
6009been cleaned.
6010
6011*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
6012bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
6013
6014*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
6015shall be delimited.
6016
6017*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
6018bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
6019bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
6020
6021*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
6022field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
6023prefixed with `ALT'.
6024
6025*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
6026bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
6027formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
6028documentation).
6029
6030*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
6031documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
6032for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
6033
6034*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
6035comma should be inserted at end of last field.
6036
6037*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
6038alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
6039signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
6040
6041*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
6042
6043*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
6044
6045*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
6046from alien sources.
6047
6048*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
6049to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
6050crossref entries.
6051
6052*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
6053region.
6054
6055*** Added support for imenu.
6056
6057*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
6058of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
6059`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
6060`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
6061
6062*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
6063from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
6064
6065** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
6066
30a009a5 6067** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
047f434a 6068
a933dad1
DL
6069** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
6070functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
6071Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
6072as an argument.
6073
6074When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
6075and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
6076
6077** browse-url changes
6078
6079*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
6080Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
6081(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
6082non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
6083customization variables.
6084
6085*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
6086
6087*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
6088lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
6089(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
6090
6091** Changes in Ediff
6092
6093*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
6094pops up the Info file for this command.
6095
6096*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
6097the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
6098merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
6099directories).
6100
6101*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
6102and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
6103files in the same directory.
6104
6105*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
6106The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
6107related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
6108
6109** Changes in Viper
6110
6111*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
79214ddf 6112*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
a933dad1
DL
6113 instead of vip-.
6114*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
79214ddf 6115*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
a933dad1
DL
6116Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
6117*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
6118*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
6119*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
6120color when Viper is in insert state.
6121*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
6122Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
6123viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
6124
6125** Etags changes.
6126
6127*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
6128default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
6129Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
6130variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
6131not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
6132
6133*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
6134
6135*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
6136constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
6137
6138*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
6139recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
6140In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
6141
6142*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
6143C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
6144recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
6145methods and protocols.
6146
6147*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
6148.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
6149column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
6150paragraph name.
6151
6152*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
6153an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
6154at least M times and as many as N times.
6155
6156** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
6157in files has changed slightly.
6158
6159With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
6160time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
6161This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
6162with old time-stamp-format values.
6163
6164In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
6165(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
6166This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
6167reasons.
6168
6169In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
6170natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
6171fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
6172(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
6173time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
6174specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
6175
6176Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
6177case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
6178truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
6179
6180The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
6181being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
6182future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
6183recommended now will continue to work then.
6184
6185See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
6186details.
6187
6188** There are some additional major modes:
6189
6190dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
6191m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
6192meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
6193
6194** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
6195copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
6196into Emacs.
6197
6198** New Lisp packages include:
6199
6200*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
6201
6202*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
6203be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
6204
6205*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
6206
6207*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
6208in shell buffers.
6209
6210*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
6211See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
6212and `elint-defun'.
6213
6214*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
6215meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
6216ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
6217strings or comments.
6218
6219These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
6220abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
6221you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
6222insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
6223at these points.
6224
6225*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
6226can visit them by short forms of their names.
6227
6228*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
6229Emacs Lisp function at point.
6230
6231*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
6232
6233*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
6234switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
6235
6236*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
6237
6238*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
6239
6240*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
6241
6242*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
6243from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
6244
6245*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
6246You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
6247inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
6248original place after inserting the copy.
6249
6250*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
6251on the buffer.
6252
6253You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
6254velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
6255(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
6256
6257Enable mouse-drag with:
6258 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
6259-or-
6260 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
6261
6262*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
6263mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
6264
6265*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
6266It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
6267
6268*** ogonek
6269
6270The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
6271Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
6272platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
6273TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
6274ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
6275prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
6276instance) and vice versa.
6277
6278To use this package load it using
6279 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
6280Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
79214ddf 6281 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
a933dad1
DL
6282 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
6283The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
6284ways of customization in `.emacs'.
6285
6286*** Interface to ph.
6287
6288Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
6289
6290The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
6291services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
6292these servers.
6293
6294*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
6295
6296*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
6297You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
6298while the real cursor does not move.
6299
6300*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
6301for visiting your favorite web sites.
6302
6303*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
6304so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
6305
6306** movemail change
6307
6308Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
6309mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
6310supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
6311user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
6312
6313This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
6314\f
6315* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
6316
6317** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
6318
6319Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
6320end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
6321Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
6322file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
6323file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
6324
6325To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
6326C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
6327coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
6328specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
6329LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
6330save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
6331\f
6332* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
6333
6334** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
6335Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
6336vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
6337Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
6338
6339** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
6340to start with w32- instead of win32-.
6341
6342In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
6343don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
6344"win".
6345
6346** Basic Lisp changes
6347
6348*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
6349evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
6350
6351*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
6352be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
6353or by the user.
6354
6355The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
6356
6357*** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
6358
6359(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
6360(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
6361
6362*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
6363usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
6364its argument.
6365
6366*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
6367
6368*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
6369
6370*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
6371
6372*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
6373error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
6374include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
6375`format' function.
6376
6377*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
6378or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
6379whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
6380
6381*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
6382either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
6383adding one of these suffixes.
6384
6385*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
6386which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
79214ddf 6387If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
a933dad1
DL
6388
6389We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
6390because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
6391
6392*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
6393
6394*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
6395You must load the `cl' library to define it.
6396
6397*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
6398conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
6399
6400 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
6401
6402BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
6403BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
6404
6405*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
6406choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
6407restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
6408works using `save-current-buffer'.
6409
6410*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
6411write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
6412of the last form.
6413
6414*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
6415which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
6416last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
6417as the last form.
6418
6419*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
6420characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
6421matches.
6422
6423For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
6424
6425*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
6426with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
6427Then it returns that string.
6428
6429For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
6430
6431(with-output-to-string
6432 (princ "The buffer is ")
6433 (princ (buffer-name)))
6434
6435returns "The buffer is foo".
6436
6437** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
6438is non-nil.
6439
6440These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
6441buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
6442characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
6443
6444*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
6445a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
6446
6447Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
6448character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
6449Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
6450position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
6451characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
6452 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
6453
6454ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
6455Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
6456non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
6457characters".
6458
6459The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
6460through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
6461"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
6462range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
6463leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
6464
6465*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
6466(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
6467multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
6468character, which may be more than one buffer position.
6469
6470This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
6471always one buffer position, need to be changed.
6472
6473However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
79214ddf 6474
a933dad1
DL
6475*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
6476because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
6477have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
6478the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
6479guaranteed.
6480
6481*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
6482between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
6483character).
6484
6485When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
6486
6487 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
6488 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
6489 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
6490 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
6491 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
6492
6493*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
6494
6495*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
6496`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
6497more than the number of characters.
6498
6499You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
6500it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
6501\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
6502is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
6503follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
6504newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
6505
6506*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
6507and returns a string containing those characters.
6508
6509*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
6510(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
6511counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
6512character, sref signals an error.
6513
6514*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
6515in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
6516string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
6517
6518*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
6519in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
6520region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
6521
6522*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
6523the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
6524to a vector of the characters in it.
6525
6526*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
6527of a string. You call it as follows:
6528
6529 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
6530
6531This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
6532STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
6533This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
6534Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
6535it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
6536
6537*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
6538if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
6539
6540*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
6541if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
6542
6543*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
6544to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
6545not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
6546which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
6547
6548(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
6549
6550This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
6551
6552The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
6553If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
6554are not included in the resulting value.
6555
6556The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
6557at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
6558WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
6559is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
6560
6561If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
6562place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
6563character extends across that column), then the padding character
6564PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
6565string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
6566column START-COLUMN.
6567
6568*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
6569the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
6570necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
6571difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
6572changed text, before the change.
6573
6574*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
6575sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
6576one character set for each script, not for each language.
6577
6578**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
6579
6580**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
6581
6582**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
6583set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
6584
6585**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
6586name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
6587which identify the character within that character set.
6588
6589**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
6590byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
6591opposite of split-char.
6592
6593**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
6594of all the characters between BEG and END.
6595
6596**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
6597of all the characters in a string.
6598
6599*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
6600and specifying coding systems.
6601
6602**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
6603system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
6604of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
6605(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
6606and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
6607as what to do about code conversion.)
6608
6609**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
6610name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
6611
6612**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
6613for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
6614except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
6615
6616Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
6617which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
6618to match against a file name.
6619
6620VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
6621a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
6622decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
6623to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
6624systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
6625specifies the coding system for encoding.
6626
6627If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
6628or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
6629
6630**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
6631the coding system to use for network sockets.
6632
6633Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
6634which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
6635either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
6636service names.
6637
6638VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
6639a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
6640decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
6641to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
6642systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
6643specifies the coding system for encoding.
6644
6645If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
6646or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
6647
6648**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
6649for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
6650except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
6651start the subprocess.
6652
6653**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
6654systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
6655when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
6656(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
6657to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
6658
6659**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
6660coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
6661subprocess.
6662
6663It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
6664but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
6665start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
6666connection permanently or until overridden.
6667
6668The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
6669file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
6670network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
6671coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
6672It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
6673system for one operation at a time.
6674
6675**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
6676files, subprocesses or network connections.
6677
6678**** The function process-coding-system tells you what
6679coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
6680The value is a cons cell,
6681 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
6682where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
6683the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
6684input to the subprocess.
6685
6686**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
6687change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
6688
6689** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
6690customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
6691you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
6692
6693You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
6694variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
6695information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
6696legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
6697customization.
6698
6699Thus, instead of writing
6700
6701 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
6702 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
6703
6704you would now write this:
6705
6706 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
6707 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
6708 :type 'boolean
6709 :group foo)
6710
6711The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
6712two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
6713describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
6714for a description of them.
6715
6716The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
6717should belong to. You define a new group like this:
6718
6719 (defgroup ispell nil
6720 "Spell checking using Ispell."
6721 :group 'processes)
6722
6723The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
6724group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
6725but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
6726to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
6727second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
6728
6729Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
6730package should have just one group; a more complex package should
6731have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
6732package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
6733first-level subgroups.
6734
6735** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
6736
6737This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
6738separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
6739
6740** easy-mmode
6741
6742The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
6743developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
6744only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
6745predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
6746`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
6747`easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
6748
6749** Text property changes
6750
6751*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
6752text property.
6753
6754*** The new functions next-char-property-change and
6755previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
6756place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
6757functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
6758starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
6759
6760If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
6761LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
6762of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
6763position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
6764
6765*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
6766value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
6767is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
6768
6769** Changes in invisibility features
6770
6771*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
6772hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
6773is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
6774should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
6775would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
6776make the overlay visible.
6777
6778During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
6779invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
6780needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
6781which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
6782the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
6783t when it should hide it.
6784
6785*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
6786
6787Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
79214ddf
FP
6788invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
6789and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
a933dad1 6790Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
79214ddf 6791manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
a933dad1
DL
6792Here is an example of how to do this:
6793
6794 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
79214ddf 6795 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
a933dad1 6796 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
79214ddf 6797 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
a933dad1
DL
6798
6799 ...
6800 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
6801
6802 ...
6803 ;; When done with the overlays:
6804 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
6805 ;; Or respectively:
6806 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
6807
6808** Changes in syntax parsing.
6809
6810*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
6811`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
6812obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
6813`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
6814
6815If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
6816is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
6817used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
6818
6819When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
6820character in the buffer is calculated thus:
6821
6822 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
6823 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
6824
6825 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
6826 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
6827 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
6828
6829 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
6830 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
6831 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
6832 determine the syntax type of the character.
6833
6834 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
6835 of the current buffer.
6836
6837*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
6838value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
6839for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
6840
6841*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
6842and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
6843only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
6844character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
6845another character with the same code (unless quoted).
6846
6847These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
6848text property.
6849
6850*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
6851arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
6852of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
6853
6854*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
6855(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
6856element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
6857nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
6858string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
6859
6860*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
6861syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
6862`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
6863
6864** Changes in face features
6865
6866*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
6867if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
6868
6869*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
6870of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
6871
6872*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
6873set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
6874
6875*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
6876set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
6877
6878*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
6879by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
6880and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
6881the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
6882overlay property).
6883
6884This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
6885arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
6886
6887** Changes in file-handling functions
6888
6889*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
6890directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
6891they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
6892is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
6893
6894This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
6895begins with ~.
6896
6897*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
6898it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
6899
6900*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
6901the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
6902
6903*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
6904as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
6905
6906*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
6907character code conversion as well as other things.
6908
6909Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
6910(formerly it did not).
6911
6912*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
6913environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
6914
6915*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
6916instead of constant strings.
6917
6918*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
6919to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
6920any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
6921
6922substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
6923in the same way as before.
6924
6925*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
6926The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
6927which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
6928
6929*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
6930error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
6931else, and returns nil.
6932
6933*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
6934directory cannot be listed.
6935
6936** Changes in minibuffer input
6937
6938*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
6939read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
6940additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
6941argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
6942ways:
6943
6944 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
6945 It is available through the history command M-n.
6946
6947*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
6948read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
6949argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
6950minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
6951enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
6952
6953In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
6954argument in this way.
6955
6956*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
6957from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
6958minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
6959
6960** Echo area features
6961
6962*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
6963echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
6964minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
6965after the echo area is cleared.
6966
6967*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
6968in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
6969
6970** Keyboard input features
6971
6972*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
6973set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
6974
6975*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
6976received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
6977by keyboard macros.
6978
6979** Frame-related changes
6980
6981*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
6982creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
6983hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
6984
6985*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
6986the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
6987has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
6988
6989*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
6990selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
6991value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
6992in the selected frame.
6993
6994*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
6995is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
6996which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
6997
6998** X Windows features
6999
7000*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
7001x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
7002x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
7003
7004*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
7005The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
7006
7007*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
7008MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
7009A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
7010
7011If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
7012it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
7013
7014** Subprocess features
7015
7016*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
7017functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
7018automatically.
7019
7020*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
7021and returns the output from the command as a string.
7022
7023*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
7024and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
7025
7026** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
7027does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
7028
7029** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
7030at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
7031goes after the other menu items.
7032
7033** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
79214ddf 7034of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
a933dad1
DL
7035around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
7036are in use.
7037
7038The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
7039series of several changes--if that seems safe.
7040
7041Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
7042after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
7043form.
7044
7045** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
7046is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
7047but its hook is still run.
7048
7049** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
7050for errors that are handled by condition-case.
7051
7052If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
7053regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
7054useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
7055
7056This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
7057are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
7058filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
7059warned.
7060
7061** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
7062way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
7063
7064** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
7065integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
7066functions like display-time.
7067
7068** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
7069name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
7070
7071** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
7072can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
7073is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
7074
7075** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
7076if there is an error in compilation.
7077
7078** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
7079switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
7080argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
7081they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
7082
7083** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
7084Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
7085the *scratch* buffer.
7086
7087** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
7088The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
7089where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
7090e.g., in Font Lock mode.
7091
7092** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
7093and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
7094It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
7095
7096** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
7097using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
7098variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
7099and compose-mail-other-frame.
7100
7101** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
7102can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
7103full name of the specified user will be returned.
7104
7105** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
7106of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
7107where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
7108in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
7109option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
7110files at all.
7111
7112** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
7113and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
7114width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
7115the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
7116
7117For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
7118minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
7119with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
7120is how %S normally pads to two positions.
7121
7122** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
7123
7124** imenu.el changes.
7125
7126You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
79214ddf 7127item from menu created by imenu.
a933dad1
DL
7128
7129An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
7130#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
7131select one of those items.
7132\f
7133* Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
7134\f
7135* Changes in Emacs 19.33.
7136
7137** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
7138mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
7139
7140** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
7141use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
7142Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
7143\f
7144* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
7145
7146** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
7147To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
7148
7149** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
7150conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
7151matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
7152expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
7153word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
7154all caps.
7155
7156** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
7157at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
7158
7159When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
7160does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
7161as in previous Emacs versions.
7162
7163** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
7164non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
7165time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
7166frames.
7167
7168** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
7169if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
7170This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
7171Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
7172accident.
7173
7174** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
7175keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
7176It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
7177line and then executing the macro.
7178
7179This command is not new, but was never documented before.
7180
7181** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
7182(something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
7183characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
7184characters.
7185
7186** Font Lock mode
7187
7188*** Font Lock support modes
7189
7190Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
7191below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
7192hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
7193to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
7194Font Lock mode is enabled.
7195
7196For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
7197
7198 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
7199
7200in your ~/.emacs.
7201
7202*** lazy-lock
7203
7204The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
7205only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
7206becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
7207Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
7208occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
7209buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
7210Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
7211
7212To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
7213
7214 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
7215
7216To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
7217
7218** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7219
7220*** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
7221paren and key.
7222
7223*** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
7224supported.
7225
7226** Gnus changes.
7227
7228Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
7229commands and variables have been added. There should be no
7230significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
7231previously released version, except in the message composition area.
7232
7233Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
7234between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
7235
79214ddf 7236*** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
a933dad1
DL
7237variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
7238obsolete.
7239
7240*** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
7241missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
7242
7243 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
7244
7245*** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
7246
7247 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
7248
7249*** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
79214ddf 7250referred.
a933dad1
DL
7251
7252*** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
7253
7254 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
7255
7256*** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
7257
7258 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
7259
7260*** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
79214ddf 7261buffers.
a933dad1
DL
7262
7263 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
7264
7265*** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
7266
7267 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
7268
7269*** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
7270
7271 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
7272
7273*** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
7274
7275 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
7276
7277*** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
7278is possible.
7279
7280 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
7281
7282*** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
7283groups of groups.
7284
7285*** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
7286
7287*** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
79214ddf 7288batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
a933dad1
DL
7289
7290*** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
7291
7292*** The Gnus cache is much faster.
7293
7294*** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
7295
7296 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
7297
7298*** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
7299expiration times.
7300
7301*** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
7302
7303*** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
7304process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
7305
7306*** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
7307articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
7308bound to keys on the `/' submap.
7309
7310*** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
7311articles with the `*' command.
7312
7313*** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
7314
7315*** Article headers can be buttonized.
7316
7317 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
7318
7319*** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
7320
79214ddf 7321*** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
a933dad1
DL
7322`nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
7323
7324*** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
79214ddf 7325buffer.
a933dad1
DL
7326
7327*** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
7328
7329*** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
7330
7331*** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
7332
7333 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
7334
79214ddf 7335*** Groups can be made permanently visible.
a933dad1
DL
7336
7337 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
7338
79214ddf 7339*** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
a933dad1
DL
7340
7341*** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
7342
79214ddf 7343*** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
a933dad1 7344
79214ddf 7345 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
a933dad1
DL
7346 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
7347
7348*** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
79214ddf 7349refetching.
a933dad1
DL
7350
7351 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
7352
7353*** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
7354buffer to allow easier treatment.
7355
7356*** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
7357
7358*** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
7359
7360 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
7361
7362*** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
79214ddf 7363articles.
a933dad1
DL
7364
7365 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
7366
79214ddf 7367*** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
a933dad1
DL
7368
7369*** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
7370cited text to hide is now customizable.
7371
7372 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
7373
7374*** Boring headers can be hidden.
7375
7376 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
7377
7378*** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
7379
7380*** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
7381
7382The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
7383in greater detail.
7384\f
7385* Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
7386
7387** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
7388second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
7389asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
7390exists.
7391
7392** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
7393as well as lists.
7394
7395** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
7396of a given keymap.
7397
7398** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
7399given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
7400keymap or nil.
7401
7402** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
7403an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
7404name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
7405menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
7406equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
7407alias.
7408\f
7409* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
7410
7411** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
7412
7413Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
7414This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
7415was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
7416far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
7417pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
7418
7419For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
7420you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
7421`http://www.vtw.org/'.
7422
7423** A note about C mode indentation customization.
7424
7425The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
7426do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
7427It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
7428much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
7429chapter of the manual for details.
7430
7431However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
7432customization variables take effect.
7433
7434** Marking with the mouse.
7435
7436When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
7437highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
7438using M-x transient-mark-mode.
7439
7440** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
7441
7442*** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
7443
7444*** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
7445to work on NT only and not on 95.)
7446
7447*** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
7448in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
7449you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
7450application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
7451applications, these problems are significant.
7452
7453If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
7454likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
7455However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
7456will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
7457other DOS application as a subprocess.
7458
7459Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
7460You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
7461
7462If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
7463subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
7464have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
7465Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
7466separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
7467Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
7468
7469** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
7470
7471This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
7472which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
7473minibuffer contains.
7474
7475** `title' frame parameter and resource.
7476
7477The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
7478It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
7479It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
7480affects just the displayed title of the frame.
7481
7482The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
7483it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
7484and also serves as the default for the displayed title
7485when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
7486
7487** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
7488enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
7489
7490** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
7491F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
7492Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
7493
7494If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
7495menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
7496something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
7497the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
7498
7499 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
7500
7501** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
7502to replace the characters it "deletes".
7503
7504** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
7505
7506** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
7507a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
7508select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
7509It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
7510immediately after the selected one.
7511
7512This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
7513made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
7514
7515** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
7516
7517Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
7518directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
7519If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
7520Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
7521recover-session.
7522
7523You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
7524auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
7525will not work.
7526
7527Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
7528normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
7529this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
7530bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
7531now that the bug is fixed.
7532
7533** Changes to Version Control (VC)
7534
7535There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
7536when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
7537Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
7538which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
7539
7540If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
7541telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
7542VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
7543the link is visited and a warning displayed.
7544
7545** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
7546Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
7547is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
7548
7549There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
7550Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
7551enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
7552The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
7553remain normal.
7554
7555** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
7556header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
7557
7558Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
7559known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
7560offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
7561Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
7562
7563Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
7564of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
7565a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
7566name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
7567documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
7568`mail-directory-stream'.)
7569
7570** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
7571skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
7572characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
7573with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
7574
7575Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
7576- to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
7577wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
7578
7579The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
7580less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
7581headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
7582Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
7583Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
7584fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
7585to a limitation in font-lock).
7586
7587External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
7588
7589** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
7590buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
7591buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
7592this example:
7593
7594 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
7595 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
7596
7597** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7598
7599*** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
7600
7601*** Font Lock mode is now supported.
7602
7603*** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
7604
7605*** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
7606entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
7607will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
7608isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
7609(bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
7610The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
7611
7612*** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
7613does the same job.
7614
7615*** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
7616"Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
7617
7618*** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
7619text.
7620
7621** Font Lock mode
7622
7623*** Global Font Lock mode
7624
7625Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
7626new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
7627font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
7628turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
7629on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
7630
7631For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
7632
7633 (global-font-lock-mode t)
7634
7635in your ~/.emacs.
7636
7637*** Local Refontification
7638
7639In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
7640However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
7641those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
7642command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
7643
7644In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
7645(The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
7646current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
7647above and below point.
7648
7649With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
7650
7651** Follow mode
7652
7653Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
7654buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
7655side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
7656they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
7657split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
7658follow-mode.
7659
7660M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
7661
7662To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
7663command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
7664
7665** hide-show changes.
7666
7667The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
7668to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
7669normal hooks.
7670
7671** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
7672The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
7673
7674** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
7675recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
7676those that begin a function, record, or macro.
7677
7678** MSDOS Changes
7679
7680*** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
7681Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
7682
7683*** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
7684and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
7685
7686*** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
7687
7688*** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
7689pressing both mouse buttons.
7690
7691*** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
7692restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
79214ddf 7693are:
a933dad1
DL
7694
7695**** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
7696now works.
7697
7698**** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
7699
7700**** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
7701implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
7702
7703**** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
7704
7705**** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
7706
7707**** `M-x recover-session' works.
7708
7709**** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
7710
7711**** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
7712\f
7713* Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
7714
7715** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
7716tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
7717remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
7718this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
7719behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
7720
7721** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
7722
7723The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
7724not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
7725need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
7726be different.
7727
7728It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
7729than `system-type'.
7730
7731See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
7732
7733** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
7734now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
7735
7736** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
7737that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
7738
7739** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
7740no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
7741reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
7742
7743The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
7744to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
7745like this:
7746
7747 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
7748
7749SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
7750It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
7751becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
7752
7753REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
7754seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
7755means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
7756
7757*** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
7758up if too much time passes.
7759
7760 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
7761
7762This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
7763If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
7764of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
7765form in BODY.
7766
7767*** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
7768a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
7769call looks like this:
7770
7771 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
7772
7773SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
7774runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
7775timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
7776ARGS.
7777
7778Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
7779command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
7780command.
7781
7782REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
7783time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
7784does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
7785each time Emacs becomes idle.
7786
7787If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
7788idle for SECS seconds.
7789
7790*** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
7791all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
7792programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
7793instead.
7794
7795*** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
7796there is no answer within a certain time.
7797
7798 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
7799
7800asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
7801within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
7802Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
7803
7804** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
7805arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
7806meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
7807arguments in between are ignored.
7808
7809This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
7810the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
7811
7812** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
7813/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
7814/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
7815site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
7816version.
7817
7818It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
7819version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
7820for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
7821has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
7822and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
7823problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
7824
7825** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
7826.abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
7827systems with limited file name syntax.
7828
7829Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
7830convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
7831for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
7832completions.el:
7833
7834(defvar save-completions-file-name
7835 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
7836 "*The filename to save completions to.")
7837
7838This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
7839depends on the operating system, because the definition of
7840convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
7841Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
7842MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
7843
7844** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
7845rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
7846minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
7847
7848** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
7849marker from its buffer position.
7850
7851** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
7852Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
7853The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
7854
7855** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
7856that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
7857condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
7858of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
7859matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
7860regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
7861
7862This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
7863errors that happen often during editing.
7864
7865** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
7866into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
7867puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
7868
7869** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
7870now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
7871
7872** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
7873a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
7874name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
7875to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
7876and not get-buffer-window.
7877
7878** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
7879calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
7880being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
7881
7882If you use this feature, you should set the variable
7883buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
7884property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
7885non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
7886are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
7887property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
7888over and over for the same text.
7889
7890** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
7891
7892*** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
7893in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
7894
7895;; @(#) HEADER: text
7896;; $HEADER: text $
7897
7898in addition to the normal
7899
7900;; HEADER: text
7901
7902*** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
7903checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
7904lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
7905\f
7906* For older news, see the file ONEWS.
7907
7908----------------------------------------------------------------------
7909Copyright information:
7910
404fa7d6 7911Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
7912
7913 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
7914 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
7915 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
7916 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
7917
7918 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
7919 of this document, or of portions of it,
7920 under the above conditions, provided also that they
7921 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
7922\f
7923Local variables:
7924mode: outline
7925paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
7926end: